Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (230 trang)

giao an tieng anh 8

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (896.25 KB, 230 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span>P:18/8/2013 Period 1: REVISION AND TEST T: ………………. I. Objectives: -To help Ss revise the grammar - To check Ss’ knowlegde. - To make Ss start the lesson of 8th form more easily. - T check Ss’ knowledge after the summer holiday. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to revise some grammar points. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to do exercises. II. Vocabulary -Revise vocabulary. III. Language focus. - Revise some grammar points. IV. Language skills. - To drill Ss reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/35 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - T checks the preparation of Ss 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: - Ss play the game: Hangman B. Presentation:  Revision: + Grammar: - Ss list the tense they have leant. - Ss present the uses of each tense. - T gives some examples to make clear. - Ss practice with the exercise given. - T corrects their mistakes if necessary. + Structures: - Ss list some main structures they have leant. - T gives some examples to make clear. - T gives exercises for Ss to practice. - T corrects.  Testing: I. Chia động từ trong ngoặc ỏ thì QKT và HTT : 1, Last week, all of the class (have)................. a cold. 2, She (learn).................... how to cook last month. 3, Hoa (wash)................ her clothes every day. 4, Mai (make) ...................a new shirt for her mother yesterday. II.Gạch chân từ đúng trong ngoặc để hoàn thành các câu sau:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span> 1, I didn’t eat chicken and (so/ neither) did my mother. 2, I didn’t go out yesterday and my sister didn’t, (either/ too). 3, Tom is a student and Peter is, (so/ too). 4, I often eat bread for breakfast and my sister does,(too/ either). III. ChuyÓn c¸c tÝnh tõ sau thµnh tr¹ng tõ: 0. beautiful : beautifully. 1, slow .............................. 4, fast ............................... 2, heavy ............................... 5, good ............................... 3, strong .............................. 6, successful .................................. 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points - Answer keys I. Chia động từ trong ngoặc ỏ thì QKT và HTT : 1- had 2- learnt 3- washes 4-made II. Gạch chân từ đúng trong ngoặc để hoàn thành các câu sau: 1- neither 2- either 3- too 4- too III. ChuyÓn c¸c tÝnh tõ sau thµnh tr¹ng tõ: 1, slowly 2, heavily 3, strongly 4, fast 5, well 6, successfully 5. Homework: - Prepare the next lesson. Unit1: Getting started & listen and read.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span> P:18/8/2013 T: ………………. Unit 1: My friends Period 2: Lesson 1: Getting started, Listen & read. I. Objectives: - To present the topic about friend. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about Hoa - Lan - Nien and to review simple present and simple past tense. - To drill listening & reading skills. II. Vocabulary - Explain some new words. to seem a next door neighbor to look like III. Language focus. - The use of the simple present and simple past tense. IV. Language skills - To drill Ss listening, reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/35 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2.Oral test: - Questions with What .......? How.........? 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: * Pelmanism - Prepare 12 cards with numbers on one side and the verbs on the other: Meet come live think send thought received met lived receive came sent - Stick the cards on the BB so Ss can see only the numbers. - Turn the cards over and see if they match. Eg: teach - taught; meet - met, give them one mark. If not, turn the cards over again and ask the next team. B. Pre - reading: - Teach the new words: . to seem: dêng nh . a next door neighbor: hµng xãm . to look like: tr«ng cã vÎ nh.. * checking; R.O.R - Give some questions: 1, Is Nien Lan’s friend or Hoa’s friend ? 2, How old is Nien? 3, Where does Nien live?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span> 4, Is she a beautiful girl? C. While - reading: - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and Lan and check if their answers are correct or not. - Give the answers Answers: 1, She is Hoa’s friend. 2, She’s 12 years old. 3, She lives in Hue. 4, Yes, she is. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to answer the given questions in the textbook. - Call some Ss to give the answers. - Call on some Ss to ask and answer the questions. D. Post - reading - Ask Ss to write a paragraph about Hoa and Lan. - Give Ss some cues and ask them to use the simple present and simple past tense to write individually. * Cues: A, Lan/ Hoa’s best friend. B, They/ same class / Quang Trung School. C, Last year / Hoa / to school / first time. D, Lan / show / around / introduce / to / new friends. - Let ss discuss with their partners. - Choose some answers and correct them in front of the class. 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the use of the simple present and simple past tense. 5. Homework: - Ss review key points. - Do exercises in the workbook. - Prepare the next lesson: Speak & listen..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span> P: 18/8/2013 T: ………………. Unit 1: My friends Period 3: Lesson 2: Speak & listen.. I. Objectives: - To develop Ss’ speaking and listening skills. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to describe someone and complete the dialogue by listening. II. Vocabulary. - Explain expressions: -How do you do? - I’d like you to meet....... - Nice to meet you. - Come and meet.............. - It’s a pleasure to meet you. III. Language focus. - The use of the simple present and simple past tense. IV. Language skills. - To drill Ss speaking and listening skills. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/35 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - During the lesson. 3. New lesson: A. Warm - up: * Brainstorming - Ask Ss to think of the adjectives use to describe body build and hair: thin curly Body build. - Possible answers: - fat - straight - short - overweight - slender - blond/ fair. hair. - slim - color: - brown. - long - tall - black/ dark - grey. B. Pre - Speaking: - Show Ss the picture of Mary and ask them to describe her hair, her body build. - Give form: Ex; She has long blond hair. She is short and thin. S + have / has + adj + hair S + be + adj.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span> - Ask Ss to give more examples. C. While - Speaking: - Prepare 6 cards so that ss can drill easily: 1. He / tall / thin. 2. She / short / slim. 3. He / short / fat. 4. long / black. 5. curly / blond. 6. straight / brown. - Show the poster of 6 people on p 11 - 12. - Call on a s to describe one person, the others guess who is described. D. Post - Speaking: - Ask Ss to practice speaking as example: S1: This person is short and thin. She has long black hair. S2: Is she Ann? S3:Is she Mary? S1: No, she isn’t. S1: Yes, she is. - Go on until 6 people on the poster are described. - Ask Ss to describe one famous person or one of their classmates and the others have to guess who. A. Pre- listening: - T presents the requirements of the lesson. - T shows these expressions: -How do you do? - Come and meet.............. - I’d like you to meet....... - It’s a pleasure to meet you. - Nice to meet you. - Ss practice reading aloud. - Ss can guess the expression to fill in each space. B. While- listening: - Ss listen to the tape twice and check their guessing. - T calls some Ss to give their answers, asks if any others have other asnwers. - T plays the tape once again, and pauses at each important sentence for Ss to check. - T gives the right answers: 1. I’d like you to meet 2. How do you do? 3. I’d like you to meet 4. It’s a pleasure to meet you. 5. Come and meet 6. Nice to meet you. - T calls some pairs to read the completed dialogue. C. Post- listening: - T calls more pairs to read the dialogues. - T gives some remarks 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the way to describe someone and some common mistakes Ss usually make. 5. Homework: - Review the key points. - Do the exercises in the workbook. - Prepare the next lesson: Read..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span> P: 18/8/2013 T: ………………. Unit 1: My friends Period 4: Lesson 3: Read. I. Objectives: - Ask Ss to open their book and read the text - Let Ss check their prediction. - Ask Ss to correct the false statements: - After the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about Ba’s friends..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span> P: 22/8/2013 T: ……….……... Unit 1: My friends Period 5 :Lesson 4 : Write. I. Objectives: - Ask Ss to read the information about Tam then answer some questions. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to write a paragraph about their close friends.. - Writing about oneself and about other people. - Call some Ss to speak in front of the class. II. Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III. Language focus. - Writing a paragraph to describe someone. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook and sub- board. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/35 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: - Kim’s game: - Ss look at the picture on P.17 quickly(30 seconds). Then ask them to keep their books closed. - Divide the class into two groups, then give Ss two questions, the group which answers correctly and fastest wins the game. a, How many people are there in the picture? (4) b, What is each person wearing? B. Presentation: * Pre- writing: - Ask Ss to read the information about Tam then answer some questions: a, What is his name? (Le Van Tam) b, How old is he? (14) c, What does he look like? (He is tall and thin. He has short black hair) d, What is he like? (He is sociable, humorous and helpful.) e, Where does he live? (He lives at 26 Tran Phu Street,Ha Noi) f, Whom does he live with? (He lives with his parents and his elder brother) g, Who is his friends? (Ba and Ba) * While- writing: - Ask Ss to write a paragraph about Tam, using the information they have just got..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span> - Ask Ss to practice individually. - Ss compare with the paragraph in their books P.15. - Ss practice writing about one of their friends after writing some information about him or her. - Get ss to share with their partners. * Post- writing: - Ask each S to write a similar paragraph about him/herself. - Move around the class and help Ss , then ask some Ss to speak in front of the class. 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss some key notes when writing a paragraph to describe someone. 5. Homework: - Ss write a paragraph about one of their family members. - Prepare :Language focus. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span> P: 22/8/2013 T: …….………... Unit 1: My friends Period 6: Lesson 5: Language focus.. I. Objectives: - Review simple present tense: formation, uses. - Call some pairs to practice the dialgue aloud. - Correct their pronunciation. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the simple present tense to talk about general truths and write some sentences using the structure “(not) + adj + enough + to- infinitive”. II. Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. a planet Mars Mercury Silly III. Language focus. - The simple present tense and the structure “(not) + adj + enough + toinfinitive”. IV. Language skills. - To drill Ss reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook and sub- board. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/35 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: * Categories: - Ask Ss to find out the adjs beginning with the letters that the T gives: - Divide the class into two groups, give 4 letters at the same time, Ss are to find out 4 adjs beginning with the 4 letters given. Example: T writes: a b c d S writes: awful big clever dirty. T writes: g h i j S writes: great heavy intelligent jealous T writes: k l m n S writes: kind lovely mean new T writes: o p q r S writes: old poor quite rich - The team which finishes first gets one mark. B. Presentation: 1. Pre teach vocabulary: - a planet: hµnh tinh. - Mars: Sao Ho¶ - Mercury: Sao Thuû - Silly: ngèc ngÕch..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span> Checking : Slap the board. 2. Revision of the simple present tense: - Review simple present tense: formation, uses. - Focus on one of the uses of the simple present: It is used to express an action which is always true. - Give Ss five verbs: be - move - set - rise - go. - Ask Ss to complete the dialogue between Ba and Tuan, his young cousin. - Get Ss to work in pair. - Call some pairs to practice the dialgue aloud. - Correct their pronunciation. 3. Structure: (not) adj enough + to-infinitive. - Ask Ss to hang the picture on the board and ask: “How do I say and how do you answer?” + Can you ...(10... this..(2)... over there? No, I..(3).. not ..(4)(5).. to ..(6)..the..(7).. over there. * Answers: T: Can you hang this picture over there? S : No, Iam not tall enough to hang the picture over there. - Form: “(not) + adj enough + to- infinitive.” - Meaning: (cha/ không) đủ ........để làm gì. - Ask Ss to practice with the Ex 4 P.17 in the textbook. - Ask Ss to practice in pairs. - Give feedback: a, not big enough. b, not old enough c, strong enough d, good enough 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the simplepresent tense. 5. Homework: - Write 5 sentences about themselves using the structure : “(not) adj enough + to - infinitive ”. - Prepare: Unit 2: Getting started & listen and read ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span> P: 22/8/2013 T:. Unit 2: Making arrangements Period 7: Lesson 1: Getting started; Listen & read. I. Objectives: - To help Ss study some new words about telephoning. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the telephone to make and confirm arrangements. II. Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. Hold on. Is six thirty alright? Where is it on? A bit far. III. Language focus. - The simple present tense. IV. Language skills. - To drill Ss listening,reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/35 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: * Getting started: - Ask Ss to match each object (pictures on P.18) with its name. * Answers: a, an answering machine. d, a telephone directory b, a mobile phone e, a public telephone. c, a fax machine f, an address book. - Give the definition of these objects on a poster and ask Ss to match the object with its definition. * Definition: 1, to send fax. 2, to find someone’s telephone number. 3, to write addresses and telephone number. 4, to make a phone call in a street telephone box. 5, to leave and take messages. 6, to make phone call anywhere you like. B. Presentation: * Pre- reading: - Give some questions for Ss to guess: a. Who made the call? b. Who introduced herself? c. Who invited the other to the movie?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span> d. Who arranged a meeting place? e. Who arranged the time? f. Who agreed to the time? - Give feedback. * While- reading: - Ask Ss to listen to the conversation. - Get ss to read the conversation. - Ask Ss to answer the given questions above. 1. Comprehension questions: - Give Ss some more questions and ask Ss to work in pairs to answer them. a. What is Hoa’s telephone number? b. Which movie are they going to see? Where? c. How is Hoa going to see the movie? d. Where are they going to meet? What time? - Get some pairs to ask and answer those questions. 2. Matching the phrases with their meaning: a, Hold on. 1, Nó đợc chiếu ở đâu? b, Is six thirty alright? 2, Kh¸ xa...... c, Where is it on? 3, Sáu giờ rỡi đợc chứ? d, A bit far. 4, (CÇm m¸y) chê nhÐ. 4. Consolidation: * Post- reading: - Ask Ss to play the roles of two Ss who are talkinhg on the phone making arrangements. - Ss can change the information if needed. - Let Ss work in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice. 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to write a similar dialogue into their notebook. - Prepare: Speak & Listen. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span> P: 01-09-2013 T:. Unit 2: Making arrangements Period 8: Lesson 2: Speak & Listen. I. Objectives: - To help Ss develop speaking skill and listening skill. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk on the phone about intentions with GOING TO and complete a telephone message by listening. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. Hold on. Is six thirty alright? Where is it on? A bit far. III.Language focus. - S + be + going to + infinitive. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss speaking and listening skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: - Chatting: - Talk to Ss about using telephone.  Do you have telephone at home?  How often do you make a phone call?  What would you say when you pick up the phone to answer it?  What would you say if you are the caller? B. Presentation: - Ask Ss to do Ex 1 on P.20. - Ss work in pairs. - Call some Ss to give the answers. - T corrects and gives the right ones: b - f - j - a - i - c - e - k - g - h - d. - Call some pairs to read the ordered dialogue aloud. - Give some more questions to check Ss ‘ understanding and focus on the structure Going to. Are they talking on the phone? (Yes) What do they intend to do? (They intend to go to the pop concert.) What time are they meeting? (They are meeting at 7.15) Where? (Inside the center) - Form: S + be + going to + infinitive. - Use: Express an intention.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span> - Give some examples to make clear. - Ask Ss to make a similar dialogue between Ba and Bao. - Call some pairs to practice speaking aloud. * Pre- listening: - Ask Ss to look at the form of the telephone message on P.21 and set the scene. - Have Ss guess the message. - Let Ss work in pairs. - Give feedback. * While- listening: - Get Ss to listen to the tape twice and fill in the message. - Ask Ss to compare with their guess. - Call some Ss to give the answers. - T plays the tape once again and pauses at each information for Ss to check. - T gives answers: kingston junior high school Date: ............................. Time:............... For: The principle. Message: Mr Mary Nguyen wanted to see you at 9.45 in the morning. Telephone number: 64683720942 * Post- Listening: - Get Ss to repeat some sentences in the tapescript. 4. Consolidation: - Revise the structure Going to. 5. Homework: - Review the use of the structure. - Do the Ex in the workbook. - Prepare:Read. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span> P: 01/9/2013 Unit 2: Making arrangements T: Period 9: Lesson 3: Read I. Objectives: - To help Ss practice reading about an inventor. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about Alexander Graham Bell. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. to emigrate to transmit to conduct to demonstrate a device a deaf- mute III.Language focus. - S + be + going to + infinitive. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/35 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Brainstorming: - Let Ss answer the questions by coming to the board and write: To chat with friend to communicate What is the telephone used for?. * Possible answers: - to have a message. - to call someone. - to make arrangements - to talk to a person who lives far away. - to get information at the airport or railway station quickly. B. Presentation: * Pre- reading: - Teach the vocabulary. to emigrate: di c. to transmit: truyÒn sãng. to conduct: tiÕn hµnh to demonstrate: minh ho¹ a device: dông cô a deaf- mute: ngêi c©m ®iÕc.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span> + Checking:What and where. - Get Ss to repeat aloud. - Give T/ F statements prediction: a, Alexander G.Bell was born in the USA. b, He worked with deaf-mute patients in a hospital in Boston. c, Thomas Watson was Bell’s assistant. d, Bell and Watson introduced the telephone in 1877. e, Bell experimented with ways of transmitting speech between deafmutes. f, Bell demonstrated his invention at a lot of exhibitions. * While- reading: - Ask Ss to read the text on p.21-22 and check their prediction. - Have Ss correct the false sentences. - Ask Ss to look at the book p.22. - Get Ss to read the events of Bell’s life and put them in the correct order. - Ask them to compare with their partners. + Alexander Graham Bell: 1. was born in Scotland. 2. went to live in Canada. 3. went to live in the USA. 4. worked with people who could neither speak nor hear. 5. worked with Thomas Watson. 6. successfully demonstrated his invention. 7. invented the telephone. 4. Consolidation: * Post- reading: - Get Ss to write a paragraph about Bell’s life, using the information from the text. 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to write the paragraph into their notebook. - Prepare: Write ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span> P:01/9/2013 Unit 2: Making arrangements T: Period 10: Lesson 4: Write I. Objectives: - To help Ss develop the writing skill. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to write a telephone message. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. a customer delivery stationery to pick Sb up III.Language focus. - S + be + going to + infinitive. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Jumbled words: 1. mcuestor = customer. 3. ayddmi = midday. 2. essgmea = message. 4. nifurretu = furniture. 5. rvseice = service. B. Presentation: * Pre- writing: - Talk to Ss about taking a telephone message. - Have you ever taken a telephone message? (Yes/ No) - What should be mentioned in the message when you take a message? ( Date, time, who sent, to whom, content) - Teach some new words: a customer: kh¸ch hµng delivery: ph©n ph¸t/ vËn chuyÓn stationery: hµng t¹p ho¸ to pick Sb up: đón ai * Checking:What and where. * While- writing: - Ask Ss to read the message and fill in the gaps in the passage on P. 23. - Let Ss work in pairs. - Ask Ss to read the passage 2 to get information and write the message. - Let Ss work individually, then compare with their partners..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span> * Answers: Thanh Cong Delivery Service Date: June 16 Time: After midday. For: Mrs. Van Message: Mr. Nam called about his stationery order. He wanted you to call him at 8634028. Taken by: Mr. Toan - Ask Ss to write another message. - Set the scene: “Tom phoned Nancy, but she was out. Lisa, Nancy’s sister took the message for Nancy. Help Lisa to write a message.” - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Lisa and Tom then write the message. - Let Ss work in pairs. 4. Consolidation: * Post- writing: - Give feedback: * Answers: Date: (.............) Time: (............) For: Nancy. Message: Tom called about playing tennis this afternoon. He will come over to pick you up at 1.30. Taken by: Lisa. 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to write the message into their notebook. - Prepare: Language focus ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span> P: 08/9/2013 T: ……………….. Unit 2: Making arrangements Period 11: Lesson 5: Language Focus. I. Objectives: - Further practice in the structure “be going to” and the adverbs of place. - Help Ss to revise some adverbs of place given in the textbook. - Help Ss to practice in groups. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. upstairs outside here there downstairs inside III.Language focus. - The simple present tense and the structure “be going to” and the adverbs of place. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook and workbook VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Matching: A B 1. make a. the time 2. arrange b. an invitation 3. introduce c. a call 4. accept d. a letter 5. send e. oneself 1:......... 2:.......... 3:........ 4:......... 5:.......... B. Presentation: 1. Language focus 1: - Explain the task and ask Ss to practice this Ex in pairs. - Call some Ss to write their answers on the board. - Ask the rest to practice orally. - Give the right answers: a, They are going to go fishing. b, Trang is going to read the new novel..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span> c, Van is going to do her homework in Math. d, He is going to see the movie on TV tonight. e, Hien is going to attend a birthday party. - Ss copy the right answers. 2. Language focus 2: - Set the scene and ask Ss to practice speaking with the given questionnaire. What are you going to do on the weekend? Are you going to.... You Your partner see a movie? play sports? meet your friends? help your parents? do your homework? watch TV? - Call some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Give some remarks. 3. Language focus 3: - Explain the way to practice. - Ask Ss to revise some adverbs of place given in the textbook. - Get Ss to practice in groups. - Call some Ss to give the answers. - Give feedback: a, upstairs. d, outside b, here e, there c, downstairs f, inside - Ask Ss to give some more examples with those advebs of place. 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the structure “be going to” and the adverbs of place. 5. Homework: - Review all key grammar points. - Prepare the next lesson: Unit 3: Getting started & Listen and repeat. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span> P: 08/9/2013 T: …….……….. Unit 3: At home Period 12: Lesson 1:Getting started & Listen and read. I. Objectives: -To help Ss study the subject of housework. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and use model verbs to talk about the housework. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. a steamer chore a cup board a sink a sauce pan III. Language focus. - The model verbs. IV. Language skills. - To drill Ss listening,reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up *Getting started: Kim’s game: - Show 6 pictures to Ss. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures quickly in 30 seconds and try to remember the verbs in the pictures as many as possible. - Which team remembering more verbs is the winner. * Answer: a, wash dishes d, cook b, make the bed e, tidy up c, sweep the floor f, feed the chicken. B. Presentation: 1. Pre- reading: - Teach the new words: a steamer: nåi hÇm chore: viÖc vÆt trong nhµ a cup board: chạn bát đĩa a sink: bån röa b¸t. a sauce pan: xoong/ nåi nÊu canh. * Checking:What and where. 2. While- reading: - Play the tape twice for Ss to practice listening..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span> - Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue in pairs. - Call some pairs to read aloud. - Present the use of the model verbs. - Give form: Has/ Have to + infinitive = must + bare infinitive. - Ask Ss to list the things Nam has to do. Nam has to. - cook the dinner - go to the market to buy fish and vegetables. - call his aunt, Ms Chi and ask her to meet his mother at grandma’s house.. 3. Post- reading: - Use the picture cues drill a, do the washing up d, cook b, make the bed e, tidy my room c, sweep the floor f, feed the chicken. - Ask Ss to practice in pairs with example exchange: S1: What do you have to do? S2: I have to do the washing up. - Call some pairs to practice. 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the model verbs. 5. Homework: - Review the key points. - Prepare the next lesson: Speak and listen. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span> P: 8/9/2013 T: ………..…... Unit 3: At home Period 13: Lesson 2: Speak. I. Objectives: - To help Ss develop their speaking skill. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the prepositions of place to talk about the positions of furniture in the house. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. OK. You are right. No, I think we’d better/ ought to put........ I think it should be........... III.Language focus. - The positions of the items. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss speaking skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2.Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: *Kim’s game: - Divide the class into 2 teams. - Show the picture of the kitchen on p.28 to Ss. - Ss look at the picture quickly in 30 seconds. - Take away the picture and ask Ss to write down as many things as they can remember. Which team having more things wins the game. B. Presentation: * Pre- speaking: - Ask Ss the positions of the items in the pictures. Where is the clock? It’s on the fridge Where is the fruit? It’s in the bowl. Where are the flowers? They are on the table. Where is the rice cooker? It’s next to the bowl of fruit. Where is the cupboard? It’s on the wall, above the counter. Where are the knives? They are on the wall, under the cupboard Where is the dish rack? It’s on the counter, next to the bowl of fruit. *While- speaking: - Get Ss to work in pairs, talking about the position of each item. E.g: The calendar is on the wall, above the stove..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span> The knives are on the wall, under the cupboard. - Ask Ss to look at the picture and talk about their ideas. - Ask Ss to practice in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice. - Give some remarks. 4. Consolidation: *Post- speaking: - Ask Ss to practice speaking: + If they agree, they may use: OK. You are right. + If they disagree, they may use: No, I think we’d better/ ought to put........ I think it should be........... 5. Homework: - Do the Ex in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson: Listen. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span> P:13/9/2013 T:. Unit 3: At home Period 14: Lesson 3: Listen. I. Objectives: - To help Ss develop their listening skill. - After the lesson, Ss will be able to identify the right item by listening. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. Special Chiness Fried Rice III.Language focus. - The positions of the items. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss listening skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34. Absent: ………………………………………………………. 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Bingo: - Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks 5 things they can eat. - Prepare a list of food. Then call out each word in a loud voice. - Ss listen carefully. If anyone has the same things, they cross them out. The first S crossing out all 5 things shout “bingo” and wins the game. * Suggested list of food: chickens, beef, cake, candy, noodles, garlic, bread, rice,.... B. Presentation: * Pre- listening:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span> + Predictions: - Get Ss to look at P.30 to guess 4 things they use to cook the “Special Chiness Fried Rice’ - Give feedback. * While- listening: - Ss listen to the tape and check their predictions. - Play the tape again for Ss to listen through. - Call some Ss to give the answers. - Give feedback: a, Fried rice.. b, Pan. c, Garlic and green peppers. d, Ham and peas.. * Post- listening: - Call some good Ss to give the recipy to cook the “Special Chiness Fried Rice’ 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss some key techniques in practice listening to catch information. 5. Homework: - Do the Ex in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span> P:23/9/2013 T:. Unit 3: At home Period 15: Lesson 4: Read. I. Objectives: - After the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the safety precautions in the house and practice using Why - because. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. a precaution a socket a match an object safety (to) destroy (to) injure III.Language focus. - Why - because. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Brainstorming: Drug electricy Boiling water. Danger in the home for children. knife. Fire gas B. Presentation: * Pre- reading: - Teach some new words: a precaution a socket a match an object safety (to) destroy (to) injure + Checking: Slap the board. - Ask Ss to read the statements and guess which is true, which is false. - Give T/F statements prediction basing on the part in textbook. - Give feedback. * While- reading:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span> a. Reading the text. - Ss read the text and check their prediction. - Ask Ss to correct if the statements is false. b. Comprehension questions: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to find out the answers of the given questions. - Ask Ss to give their answers by both orlly and in writing. - Give answers: a. Because children often try to eat and drink them. b. Because the kitchen is a dangerous place. c. Because playing with one match can cause the fire. d. Because children often try to put ST into electrical sockets and electricity can kill. e. Because the dangerous objects can injure or kill children. 4. Consolidation: * Post - reading: Discussion: - Ask Ss to work in groups, discussing about the topic. a. Safety precautions in the street. b. Safety precautions at school. 5. Homework: - Practice in Why questions with Because- answer . ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span> P:13/9/2013 T:. Unit 3: At home Period 16: Lesson 5: Write. I. Objectives: - After the lesson, Ss will be able to write a description of a room in their house. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. folder beneath towel rack dish rack III.Language focus. - Write a description of their room or living room. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ……………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Chatting: - Ask Ss something about the room on P.32:  which room is this?  What’s this? Where is it? B. Presentation: * Pre- writing: - teach some new words: folder beneath towel rack dish rack lighting fixture Checking: R.O.R - Ask Ss to read the description of Hoa’s room, then ask some comprehension questions: a. What is there on the left of the room? There is a desk. b. Where is the bookself? It is above the desk. c. What is there on the right side of the room? There is a window. d. Where is the wardrobe? It is beside the window and opposite the desk. * While- writing: - Ask Ss to describe Hoa’s kitchen, using the given cues. - Ss practice writing individually..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span> - Ask some Ss to give their own writing on the board while the others read it aloud. + Answer: This is Hoa’s kitchen. There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the room. Next to the refrigerator are the stove and the oven. On the other side of the oven, there is a sink and next to the sink is a towel rack. The dish rack stands on the counter, on the right of the window and beneath the selves. On the selves and on the counter beneath the window, there are jars of sugar, flour and tea. In the middle of the kitchen, there is a table and four chairs. The lighting fixture is above the table, and directly beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with flowers. - Ask Ss to share and correct their own writing. 4. Consolidation: * Post- writing: - Ss talk about their partners about their room/ living room/ kitchen. 5. Homework: - Ss write a description of their room or living room. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span> P:30 /9/2012 T:. Unit 3: At home Period 17: Lesson 6: Language focus. I. Objectives: - Further practice on the reflexive pronouns, the modals and Why - Because. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. III.Language focus. - Further practice on the reflexive pronouns, the modals and Why - Because. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25 Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: String: - Give the word and ask Ss to form another word by taking the last letter of the previous word. Example: English - high - hello - on - .............. B. Presentation: a. The modals: have to / must: - Ss read the dialogue between Nam and Mrs Vui again and find out the sentences which contain the modal: have to. - Revise the list of things Nam has to do. - Give form: Has/ Have to + infinitive = must + infinitive. - Give Ss 7 words : feed - empty - tidy - sweep - clean - dust - do. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and complete the dialogue between Nga and Lan. - Ss practice in pairs. - Give key: have to do - must tidy - have to dust - must sweep - have to clean must empty - must feed. - Ss copy and practice reading again. b, The modal: ought to: - Set the scene: “ Hoa is very sad because she failed her English test. What do you say to advise her? ” - “You should study harder” - another way: “You ought to study harder” - Use: ought to as well as should is used to give advice to someone. - Form: ought to + infinitive..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span> - Ask Ss to give advice to people in the pictures. - Get Ss to give answers orally. - Key: b. You ought to get up earlier. c, You ought to eat more fruits and vegetable. d, You ought to see the dentist. c. The reflexive pronouns: - Set the scene: You do your homework and noone helps you. What do you say? I do my homework myself - Form: We use I with myself you yourself / yourselves he himself she herself we ourselves they themselves it itself - Used to emphasize a person or a thing. E.g: She cut herself John saw himself in the mirror. - Give Word Cues Drill. d. Why - Because: - Set the task, and ask Ss to revise the way to practice. - Ask Ss to practice orally. - Call some pairs to practice aloud. - Correct and remark. 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points. 5. Homework: - Revise and do the Ex. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span> P:30/9 /2012 T:. Period 18: Revision. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice with all the tenses they have learnt II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words and phrases. III.Language focus. - Further practice with all the tenses. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25 Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: String: English - home - e........... B. Presentation: I. The Simple Present Tense: - uses: - express the habittual actions. - Form: +) S + V / Vs/es + O - ) S + don’t / doesn’t + V + O ? ) Do / Does + S + V + O ? - Examples: I go to school on foot. She washes her clothes everymorning. Nam doesn’t like sports very much. Do you like watching T.V ? II. The Present Progressive Tense: - Uses: - to express the action happening at the time of speaking. - Form: (+ ): S + am / is / are + V_ing + O..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span> (- ): S + amnot / isn’t / aren’t + V_ing + O. (? ): Am / Is / Are + S + V_ing O ? - Examples: Are you going to Hanoi ? She isn’t studying now. I am listening to the music at the moment. III. The Present Perfect Tense: - Uses: to express the actions happened in the past but relate to the present. - Form: (+): S + have / has + VPP + O. (- ): S + haven’t / hasn’t + VPP + O. (? ): Have / Has + S + VPP + O ? - Examples: I have taught English here for 7 years. She hasn’t written any letters since then. Have you ever heard about him ? IV. The Simple Past: - Uses : to express the actions happened. - Form: +) S + Ved + O - ) S + didn’t + V + O. ? ) Did + S + V + O ? - Examples: I watched T.V last night. She went to Ho Chi Minh City last year. They didn’t talk to eachother yesterday. Did he tell you about his birthday party ? V. The Simple Future Tense: - Uses: to express the actions that are going to happen. - Form: (+): S + will + V + O. (- ): S + won’t + V + O. (? ): Will + S + V + O ? - Examples: I will go to Hanoi tomorrow. She won’t come to Sapa this Summer. Will they write to her ? 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points. 5. Homework: - Review and do the Ex given. -----------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span> P:30/9/2012 Period 19: written test 1 T: Time allowance: 45 minutes I. Objectives: - To check Ss’ knowledge from untit 1 to unit 3 - To do a written test (Listening, reading and writing; vocabulary & structure) II. Vocabulary - Revision III. Language focus - Present perfect tense , passive voice with tenses: IV. Language skills - To drill Ss listening , writing, and reading skills. V. Preparation: - Text book VI. Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization. Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25 Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Check up.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span> - Check the preparation of Ss. A. Matric. Tenses. Vocabular, grammar. Tenses. Applying Recognizing Understandin Low high g Knowledge TNK TNK TNK TNK TL TL TL TL Q Q Q Q. 4. 8S 4M 40%. 4 2 answerText -. 2. Total. Reading. 4. 4S 2M 20 %. pronounReflexive. Tenses. 2. Writing 4. 4 2. Total. 8C 4M 40%. 8S 4M 40% 2. 8C 4M 40%. B. Questions I. Choose the best answer: 1. Mary will ............. here at Christmas. A. is B. be C. are 2. It’s very difficult .............. the exam. A. to pass B. pass C. passing 3. What are you going ......... at weekend? A. do B. doing C. to do 4. Did it .......... in the morning? A. rained B. rain C. rains 5. Alexander G. Bell was born...........the USA. A. in B. at C. on 6. She is living ....... her aunt. A. with B. At C. about. 4C 2M 20%. D. been D. passed D. did D. raining D. over D. of. 20 S 10 M.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span> 7. Let’s ........to the restaurant. A. going B. go C. to go D. goes. 8. Who ........... the telephone? A. invent B. inventing C. invention D. invented. II. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the blanks: 1. Last year, we ( live )................................. in Nha Trang. 2. She ( visit ).......................................... her friends next month. 3. Minh ( not / wear )..................................... shoes everyday. 4. He ( come ) to the class late yesterday. III. Fill in the gap with suitable reflexive pronouns: 1. We protect ................... from the rain with an umbrella. 2. She likes to look at ..................... in the mirror. 3. The dog hurt ......................... when it jumped over the fence. 4. I must learn to control ................. IV.Read the test and answer the questions Viet is a student and he lives in a suburb of HaNoi.It’s apart of an old house . He has one room and a kitchen and shares a bathroom with three other people . In his room , there is a bed on the left hand side . There is an armchair beside the bed.The desk is opposite the bed and there is a closet on the right side of the room . Above the desk , there is a bookshelf and above the bed there is a clock. He has a tv and a hi-fi, too. In the kitchen , there is a cooker on the right hand side. The sink is near the cooker . There’s a small table and two chairs in the center. The kitchen is small , but it’s ok. Viet likes his room very much 1.Where does Viet live? =>.................................................................................................... 2.How many people share the bathroom with Viet? =>.......................................................................... 3.What is there on the right side of the room ? =>................................................................................... 4.Where is the cooker? =>........................................................................................................ * Answer and marks I. Choose the best answer ( 4 points) 1. Mary will ............. here at Christmas. A. is B. be C. are 2. It’s very difficult .............. the exam. A. to pass B. pass C. passing 3. What are you going ......... at weekend? A. do B. doing C. to do 4. Did it .......... in the morning? A. rained B. rain C. rains 5. Alexander G. Bell was born...........the USA.. D. been D. passed D. did D. raining.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span> A. in B. at C. on D. over 6. She is living ....... her aunt. A. with B. At C. about D. of 7. Let’s ........to the restaurant. A. going B. go C. to go D. goes. 8. Who ........... the telephone? A. invent B. inventing C. invention invented. II. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the blanks: ( 2 points) 1. lived 3. doesn’t wear 2. will visit 4. came III. Fill in the gap with suitable reflexive pronouns: ( 2 points) 1. Ourselves 2. herself 3. itself 4. myself IV.Read the test and answer the questions 1. He lives in a suburb of Ha Noi 2. Three other people share a bathroom with Viet 3. There is a closet on the right side of the room 4. The cooker is on the right hand side 4. Consolidation: - Collect all testing papers - Give some remarks. 5. Homework: - Revise the grammar points. - Prepare for the next lesson. ------------------------***--------------------------. D..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span> P:30/9/2012 T:. Unit4:Ourpast Period 20:Lesson 1: Getting started & Listen and read. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to tell the activities people used to do in the past. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. to look after equipment folk tale traditional great grandma III.Language focus. - The activities people used to do in the past. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss listening, reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25 Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Give back the testing papers. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Getting started: - Ss look at the picture on P.38 and write the names of the things that do not belong to the past. * Answer: The TV the radio the mobile phone the light fixture the modern clothing/ school uniform. B. Presentation: * Pre- reading: - Teach the new words: to look after equipment folk tale traditional great grandma + Checking: R.O.R - Give T/F statement prediction:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span> a. Nga used to live on a farm. b. Nga’s grandmother didn’t go to school. c. She has an easy and happy life when she was young. d. There wasn’t any modern equipment at her time. e. The lost shoe is a short story. * While- reading: - Ask to read the dialogue betwwen and her Grandma and check their prediction. - Ask them to correct the false statements. - Give feedback. - Ask Ss to give the answers to the given questions in textbook in pairs. - Call some Ss to give their own answers. - Give the right answers: a. She used to live on a farm. b. Because she had to stay at home and help her mom to look after her young brothers and sisters. c. She used to cook the meals, clean the house and wash the clothes. d. Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and her great grandma used to tell stories. e. She asked her grandma to tell her the tale’ The lost shoe.” - Give feedback. - Ask Ss to do the Ex 3 in textbook. Fact Opinion a. I used to live on a farm X b. There wasn’t any electricity X c. Mom had to do everything without the help of X modern equipment. d. My father used to tell us stories. X e. The best one was The lost shoe X f. Traditional stories are great. X - Give feedback. 4. Consolidation: * Post- reading: - Survey: Did you use to....... Name - get up late ? - ride bike too fast ? - go to school late ? - eat too much candy ? - forget to do the homework ? 5. Homework: - Do the Ex -1’2-(page 27) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson-Speak & Listen.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span> DuyÖt :10/9/2012 TT P:30/9/2012 T:. NguyÔn Sü Quang Unit 4: Our past Period 21: Lesson 2: Speak & Listen. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson. - Ss will be able to use USED TO to talk about the things they used to do. - Ss will be able to understand the main idea of a story by listening. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. foolish greedy gold to lay - laid - laid amazement III.Language focus. - The activities people used to do in the past. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss listening, reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25 Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: -During the lesson. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Jumbled words: - Electricity : rieletcicty - Entertainment : menttaenterin - Market : rkmaet - supermarket : permasuekt B. Presentation: * Presentation: - Recall the conversation between Nga and her grandma, then ask: Where did Nga’s grandma always live? - She always lived on a farm. - Ask: “ Another word for always lived ?” - Used to live. - Ask Ss to use USED TO to make question and answer: Where did Nga’s grandma use to live? - She used to live on a farm. + Form: S + USED TO + infinitive S + didn’t use to + infinitive..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span> Did + S + use to + infinitive ? + Use: used to express a past habit, or an action usually happened in the past. * Practice: - Give Word Cue Drill: a. live / Hue / Hanoi - Did you use to live in Hue ? - No, I used to live in Hanoi. b. have / long hairs / short hairs - Did you use to have long hairs? - No, I used to have short hairs. c. get up / late / early. d. walk to school / go by bike. e. study / evening / early morning. * Production: - Compare two pictures on P.40, using “USED TO” to talk about the actions in the past. - Elicit some ideas so that Ss can talk about them. a. Where did they use to live in the past ? And now ? - They used to live in small houses. Now they live in big houses or buildings. b. How did they travel ? c. What’s about electricity ? d. What’s about their life / work ? e. Did children use to go to school ? f. What’s about their entertainment ? * Pre- listening: - Teach some new words : foolish greedy gold to lay - laid - laid amazement + Checking : What and Where - Get Ss to predict the moral lesson of the story. a. Don’t kill chickens. b. Don’t be foolish and greedy. c. Be happy with what you have. d. It’s difficult to find gold. - Give feedback. * While- listening: - Have Ss listen to the tape twice, then check their prediction. Answer: b. Don’t be foolish and greedy. - Play the tape twice and pause at each sentence for Ss to repeat . - Call some good Ss to retell the story (in Vietnamese is OK). - Sum up the main content of the story. 4. Consolidation: * Post- listening: - Have some good Ss retell the story..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span> 5. Homework: - Write about the things you used to do last year. -Do exercises-3-4(28) in work book. - Do the Ex 5-6( page 29-30) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson-Read P: 30/9 /2012 Unit 4: Our past T: Period 22: Lesson 4: Read I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand and retell the story “The lost shoe”. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. cruel upset fairy immedietely magical rag fall in love with III.Language focus. - The activities people used to do in the past. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss listening, reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25 Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Brainstorming: - Name some folk tale that you have read. Cây tre trăm đốt TÊm c¸m Hoµng tö cãc ( one hundred section ( The frog prince) bamboo) The folk tale. §«i hµi v¹n dÆm lïn. Nµng b¹ch tuyÕt vµ b¶y chó ( Snow White and 7 drarfs). B. Presentation: * Pre - reading:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span> - Teach the vocabulary: cruel immedietely magical. upset. fairy. rag. fall in love with. + Checking: ROR. - Give T / F statement predictions: A, Little Pea’s father is a poor farmer. B, Her father got married again after his wife died. C, Her new mother was beautiful and nice to her. D, She worked hard all day. E, She didn’t have new clothes to take part in the festival. - Ss guess which sentence is true, which is false. Then compare with the partners. * While - reading: - Have Ss read the story The lost shoe and check their prediction, then correct the false ones. + Give the comprehension questions: - Ss work in pairs to answer the questions in Ex 2 on P. 42. - Give feedback. - Give correct answers: a. She was a poor farmer’s daughter. b. She made her do the chores all day. c. A fairy appeared and magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes. d. He decided to married Little Pea because the shoe fitted her. e. Ss’ answers. + Gap filling: Complete the sentences with words given from the story. - Ask Ss to wprk in pairs, filling the blanks with suitable words from the story. a. farmer. b. died c. had/ used d. marry/ choose e. New clothes f. Lost - Ss copy the answers. 4. Consolidation: * Post - reading: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to tell the story again in details. 5. Homework: - Do Ex 7(page 31) - Rewrite the story. - Prepare the next lesson-Write. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span> P: 04/10/2013 T: ……………... Period 23: Unit 4: Our past Lesson 5: Write. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use Simple Pasyt Tense to write a folktale. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. wisdom a stripe a straw a servant to escape to graze to light III.Language focus. - The activities people used to do in the past. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:……………………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Chatting: - Ask Ss some questions about imaginary stories. Do you want to read imaginary stories ? Name some of them. Which story do you like best ? Have you ever read the story “ How the tiger got his stripes ?” B. Presentation: * Pre - writing: - Teach some new words: wisdom a stripe a straw a servant to escape to graze to light + Checking: matching. + Reading: read and complete the story. - Ask Ss the meanings of the verbs in the box. - Have Ss work in pairs using suitable verbs to fill in the blanks. - Give feedback and the right answers. + Comprehension questions: - Ask Ss to work in groups of four, answering the following questions:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span> a. Where was the man ? b. What did the buffalo do when the tiger appeared ? c. What did the tiger want to know ? d. What did he do before going home ? Why ? e. What did he do when he returned ? - Get Ss to ask and answer questions. * While - reading: - Get Ss to change: the man I His my. - Get ss to write individually then share with their partners and correct mistake. - Take some writings to correct in front of the class. - Divide the class into two teams, team A plays the role of the tiger, team B plays the roles of the buffalo. 4. Consolidation: * Post - writing: - Ss work in team to tell the story. 5. Homework: - Write the story again, imagine you are:  the tiger  the buffalo.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span> P: 4/10/2013 T:. Period 24: Unit 4: Our past Lesson 5: Language focus. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use preposition of time and USED TO ( to talk aboout the action which always happens in the past.) II.Vocabulary. - Remind Ss the prepositions of time. III.Language focus. - The activities people used to do in the past. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:……………………………………………………………… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Matching: - Match these verbs with their past form: A B A B 1.Run a.Ran 6.Fly f.came 2. take b. was/ were 7. ride g. ate 3. go c. had 8. eat h. rode 4. have d. took 9. sit i. sat 5. be e. went 10. come j. flied B. Presentation: a. Part 2: - Ss work in pairs to complete the dialogue. - Call some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Give some remarks on their practice. - Give key. b. Part 3: - Remind Ss the prepositions of time. - Give some examples to make clear. - Ask Ss to practice with the Ex in textbook. - Give feedback. - T gives the answers: b. in c. between d. at - after e. Before. - Ss copy the right answers. c. Part 4: - Revive the structure: USED TO. - Ss give some examples on their own..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span> - T explains the tasks. - Ss practice with the Ex in textbook. - Call some ss to give their answers. - T corrects: (1) used to have (2) used to be (3) used to live - Ss copy the answers. 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the way to use the structure USED TO. 5. Homework: - Review all key points, then do the Ex in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span> Pre: 04/10/2013 Period 25: T: Test Correction the written test 1 I.Objectives: - During the lesson Ss will be able to realize their weakness and how to improve their skills. II. Teaching aids. - Papers III. Teaching procedures: 1. Class organization. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:……………………………………………………………… 2.Oral test. -Ask ss to give the main form structures in the written test. 3. New lesson I. Choose the best answer: 1. Mary will ............. here at Christmas. A. is B. be C. are D. been 2. It’s very difficult .............. the exam. A. to pass B. pass C. passing D. passed 3. What are you going ......... at weekend? A. do B. doing C. to do D. did 4. Did it .......... in the morning? A. rained B. rain C. rains D. raining 5. Alexander G. Bell was born...........the USA. A. in B. at C. on D. over 6. She is living ....... her aunt. A. with B. At C. about D. of 7. Let’s ........to the restaurant. A. going B. go C. to go D. goes. 8. Who ........... the telephone? A. invent B. inventing C. invention D. invented. II. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the blanks: 1. Last year, we ( live )................................. in Nha Trang. 2. She ( visit ).......................................... her friends next month. 3. Minh ( not / wear )..................................... shoes everyday. 4. He ( come ) to the class late yesterday. III. Fill in the gap with suitable reflexive pronouns: 1. We protect ................... from the rain with an umbrella. 2. She likes to look at ..................... in the mirror. 3. The dog hurt ......................... when it jumped over the fence. 4. I must learn to control ................. IV.Read the test and answer the questions Viet is a student and he lives in a suburb of HaNoi.It’s apart of an old house . He has one room and a kitchen and shares a bathroom with three other people . In his room , there is a bed on the left hand side . There is an armchair beside the bed. The desk is opposite the bed and there is a closet on the right.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span> side of the room. Above the desk, there is a bookshelf and above the bed there is a clock. He has a tv and a hi-fi, too. In the kitchen , there is a cooker on the right hand side. The sink is near the cooker . There’s a small table and two chairs in the center. The kitchen is small , but it’s ok. Viet likes his room very much 1.Where does Viet live? 2.How many people share the bathroom with Viet? 3.What is there on the right side of the room ? 4.Where is the cooker? * Answer and marks I. Choose the best answer ( 4 points) 1. Mary will ............. here at Christmas. A. is B. be C. are D. been 2. It’s very difficult .............. the exam. A. to pass B. pass C. passing D. passed 3. What are you going ......... at weekend? A. do B. doing C. to do D. did 4. Did it .......... in the morning? A. rained B. rain C. rains D. raining 5. Alexander G. Bell was born...........the USA. A. in B. at C. on D. over 6. She is living ....... her aunt. A. with B. At C. about D. of 7. Let’s ........to the restaurant. A. going B. go C. to go D. goes. 8. Who ........... the telephone? A. invent B. inventing C. invention D. invented. II. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the blanks: ( 2 points) 1. lived 3. doesn’t wear 2. will visit 4. came III. Fill in the gap with suitable reflexive pronouns: ( 2 points) 1. Ourselves 3. itself 2. herself 4. myself IV.Read the test and answer the questions 1. He lives in a suburb of Ha Noi 2. Three other people share a bathroom with Viet 3. There is a closet on the right side of the room 4. The cooker is on the right hand side 4. Consolidation - Remind Ss some common mistakes they have 5. Home work. - Note the way to have better written test and prepare new lesson..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span> P: 09/10/2013. Unit 5: Study habits Period 26: Lesson 1: Getting started & Listen and read. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the dialogue between Jim and his Mom about his study. II. Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. a report card pronunciation to improve to be proud of to try one’s best to III. Language focus. - The activities people used to do in the past. IV. Language skills. - To drill Ss listening, reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Network: Chemistry Physics math. Subjects At school Geography Literature B. Presentation: * Pre - reading: + Chatting: What subject are you good at ? What subject are you bad at ? What subject do you like best ? Why ? How often do you have Math / Literature / English ?. history. - Teach some new words in the dialogue: a report card pronunciation to improve to be proud of to try one’s best to + Checking: R.O.R + T/ F statements prediction: - Ask Ss to read the statements and predict they are true or false. - Ask them to share with their partners..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span> * While - reading: - Ss read the dialogue and do the T / F Ex. - Give feedback. Guess Correct a. F Tim was in the livingroom b. T c. F His report is excellent d. T e. F He needs to improve his Spanish pronunciation. f. T + Comprehension questions: - Ask Ss to work in pairs, answering the questions on P. 47. - Give feedback. - T gives the right answers: a. She is Tim's teacher b. She gave her Tim's report. c. He worked really hard. d. She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation. e. She gave him a dictionary. - Ask Ss to work in open pairs the closed pairs. 4. Consolidation: * Post - reading: + Survey: Ask: What subject do you need to improve ? Name What subject Mai Literature Nam ....................... - Give feedback. - Ask Ss who need to improve the same subject work in groups and discuss how to improve. 5. Homework: - Write the way how to improve the subject that you are not good at. - Do Ex 1(page 32) in workbook - Pre Unit 5-Speak.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span> P: 09/10/2013 T:. Unit 5: Study habits Period 27: Lesson 2: Speak & Listen. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their study habits and be able to listen for specific information to fill in a report card. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. behavior a paticipant satisfactory cooperation attendance to appreciate. III.Language focus. - The activities people used to do in the past. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss listening and speaking skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: *Jumbled words: Tahms : Maths retutrelia : literature Ihgsen : English ygogepahr : Geography; * Brainstorming: How to improve your English ?  Speak English to your friends  Watch English TV  Listen to the English radio program.  Do grammar exercises  Read English stories  Read English newspapers / magazines B. Presentation: * Pre - speaking: - Talk about Ss’ study habits, when and how much time they spend learning . - Explain the tasks. * While - speaking:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span> - Ask Ss to work in pairs, asking their partners questions and taking notes the answers. Example exchange: S1: When do you do your homework ? S2: I do my homework after dinner/ after school / late at night. S1: Who help you with your homework ? S2: My parents/ brother/ sister do/does. S1: ...................................... - Call some Ss to practice in front of the class. * Post - speaking: - Ss work in groups of 4 or 5 to report what they have known about their partners’ study. - Ss can use this structure to talk:  Nam said he did his homework after dinner.  Hoa said her father helped her with her homework.  Lan said she spent two hours studying Math.  Ba said he needed to improve English.  Mai said she should do more grammar exercises * Pre - listening: -Teach the vocabulary: behavior a paticipant satisfactory cooperation attendance to appreciate. + Open prediction: - Ask Ss to look at Nga’s report and predict the missing information and then compare with their partners’. * While - listening: - Get Ss to listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Give the right ones. (1) 87 days present (4) Listening: Comprehension. (2) 5 days absent (5) Speaking: A (3) Participation: Spanish (6) Reading: A pronunciation. (7) Writing: B 4. Consolidation: * Post - listening: + Comprehension questions: a. Who are Nga’s parents? b. What is Nga’s teacher’s name ? c. What subject was reported ? For what term ? d. What are the comments ? e. What does S stand for ? What about about F, U, A, B, C, D ? - Ss work on their own to answer the questions..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span> - Give feedback. 5. Homework: - Do the Ex-2-3(page33) in workbook. - Write something about yourpartners’ study habits. E.g: “ Hoa is my best friend. She works very hard and always gets good grades. She usually does her homework after school..............” - Prepare the next lesson-Read. P: 09/10/2013 T:. Unit 5: Study habits Period 28: Lesson 4: Read. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text and get specific information. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. mother tongue to underline to highlight to come across to stick III.Language focus. - The activities people used to do in the past. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Chatting:  Do you like learning English ?  How many new words do you try to learn a day?  What do you do when you read a new word ?  How do you learn / remember new words ? B. Presentation: * Pre - reading: - teach the vocabulary: mother tongue to underline to highlight to come across to stick + Checking : Slap the board.+ Brainstorming: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of the way how a learner can learn new words.  Learn by heart..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span>  Learn through example sentences.  Write it on a piece of paper and stick everywhere in the house.  Translate it into mothertongue  Write it on a piece of paper and put it into the pocket to learn whenever * While - reading: + True / False statements: - Ask Ss to read the statements on p.50 then read the text and dicide which is true, which is false. a. All language learners write the meaning of the new words in their mother tongue b. Some learners write examples of the words they want to learn. c. Every learners tries to learn all the new words they want to come across. d. Many learners only learn the new words that are important. - Give feedback. Answers: a. F b. T c. F d. T + Comprehension: - Have Ss work in pairs to answer the questions on p.50. - Give feedback. Answers: a. No. They learn words in the same ways. b. Because they help them to remember the use of new words. c. They write examples, put the words and their meanings on stickers, underline or highlight them. d. They may think they can't do so. Instead, they learn only important words. e. Revision is neccessary in learning words. f. Learners should try different ways of learning words to find out what is the best. - Ss practice asking and answering questions in open pairs or closed pairs. 4. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to report about their groups. 5. Homework: - Write the ways of learning words that you think are the best for you. - Do the Ex 4-5-6(page34-35) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson- Read (con’t)..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span> P: 16/10/2013. Unit 5: Study habits Period 29: Lesson 4: Read (con’t). I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text and get specific information. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. mother tongue to underline to highlight to come across to stick III.Language focus. - The activities people used to do in the past. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Chatting:  Do you like learning English ?  How many new words do you try to learn a day?  What do you do when you read a new word ?  How do you learn / remember new words ? B. Presentation: * Pre - reading: - re-write the vocabulary: mother tongue to underline to highlight to come across to stick + Checking : Slap the board.+ Brainstorming: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of the way how a learner can learn new words.  Learn by heart.  Learn through example sentences.  Write it on a piece of paper and stick everywhere in the house.  Translate it into mothertongue  Write it on a piece of paper and put it into the pocket to learn whenever * While - reading: + True / False statements: - Ask Ss to read the statements on p.50 then read the text and dicide which is true, which is false..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span> a. All language learners write the meaning of the new words in their mother tongue b. Some learners write examples of the words they want to learn. c. Every learners tries to learn all the new words they want to come across. d. Many learners only learn the new words that are important. - Give feedback. Answers: a. F b. T c. F d. T + Comprehension: - Have Ss work in pairs to answer the questions on p.50. - Give feedback. Answers: a. No. They learn words in the same ways. b. Because they help them to remember the use of new words. c. They write examples, put the words and their meanings on stickers, underline or highlight them. d. They may think they can't do so. Instead, they learn only important words. e. Revision is neccessary in learning words. f. Learners should try different ways of learning words to find out what is the best. - Ss practice asking and answering questions in open pairs or closed pairs. 4. Consolidation: * Post - reading: Survey: . . . Ways of learning words Nga Hoa . . .  1. Make a list of words, their meaning and learn them by heart.  2. Write some sample sentences with new words. 3. Stick new words somewhere in the house. 4. Underline or highlight the words. 5. Read stories in English. 6. Learn words through song. - Ask Ss to report about their groups. 5. Homework: - Write the ways of learning words that you think are the best for you. - Do the Ex-4-5-6(page34-35) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson-Write. ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span> P:16/10/2013 T:. Unit 5: Study habits Period 30: Lesson 5: Write. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the format of a friendly letter and practice writing a letter to a friend. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Lunar New Year Festival enjoyable celebrate III.Language focus. - The activities people used to do in the past. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Chatting:  Have you ever written to someone ?  To whom do you usually write ?  What do you often write about ? B. Presentation: * Pre - writing: - Teach some new words: Lunar New Year Festival enjoyable celebrate + Checking: R.O.R - Ask Ss to put the part of the letter in the correct order. - Give feedback. a. Opening d. Body of the letter b. Closing e. Signature c. The date f. Writer's address. + Answers: f-c-a-d-b-e - Ask Ss to read the letter on P.51 to check their order. - Ask Ss to label each section with the correct letter..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span> - Ss work in pairs to answer these questions: a. Who wrote the letter ? to whom ? b. What are there in the heading ? c. What is the main part of the letter ? d. What did Hoa receive a few weeks ago ? e. Is Hoa good at Math ? f. What subject is Hoa good at ? g. Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar New year Festival ? - Give feedback. - T gives the correct answers. - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering questions. * While - writing: - Ss imagine that they are Lan and write a letter to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco using the given information. + Answers: 15 Thanh Giong Street Hanoi, June 10th, 2004. Dear Donna, Thanks for your letter. I'm glad to hear that you had an interesting/ enjoyable Mother'sDay. We received our second semester report last month. I got good grades for Geography, Physics and Math but my English and History results were poor. My teacher advised me to improve English and History. I think I have to study harder next school year. In a few weeks, we are going to celebrate the mid-Autumn festival. That is an Autumn moon festival in Vietnam. This afternoon, I'm going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus and I'm going to stay there with them untill the festival comes. I'll send you a postcard from there. Write soon and tell me all your news. Best. Lan 4. Consolidation: * Post - writing: + Correction: - Ask Ss to read out their letters and correct the mistakes. 5. Homework: - Write a letter to your friend to tell him/ her about your second semester report and your summer holiday. - Do the Ex-7-8-9(page36-37) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson-. Language focus.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span> P: 16/10/2013 T:. Unit 5: Study habits Period 31: Lesson 6: Language focus. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use adverbs of manner and modal Should as an advice. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III.Language focus. - The adverbs of manner and modal Should as an advice. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Pelmanism: Good Warm Bad Fast badly Rode Eat Ate Sit Sat B. Presentation: * Presentation 1: - Set the scene. - Help Ss distinguish the use of adjectives and adverbs. - Ss practice in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Give some remarks. * Presentation 2: - Ss look at the pictures and answer the questions: Is Mr Hao’s house new ? Is the wall discolored ? How is the door ? - Ss practice in pairs to discuss what Mr Hao should do. - Ss compare with their partners. - T corrects. * Presentation 3: - T intrduces the ways to practice. - Ss focus on the main grammar. - Ss practice with their partners. - Call some Ss to give their answers aloud. - T corrects and gives the right answers..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span> * Presentation 4: - T presents the tasks. - Ss practice on their own. - T calls some Ss to give the answers. - Correct and give the right ones. 4. Consolidation: - Sum up the key points. 5. Homework: - Review all key points. -Re-do all exercises ------------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span> P:23/10/2013. Unit 6: The youngpioneers club Period 32: Lesson 1: Getting started & Listen and read. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and practice in gerunds used after some verbs: love, like, hate, enjoy. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. to enroll answer application form outdoor activities III.Language focus. - The gerunds used after some verbs: love, like, hate, enjoy. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss listening,reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Chatting:  What do you usually do on your summer holiday ?  Are you members of the Young Pioneers and Youth Organization ?  Are there any activity programs for the summer ?  Do you take part in them ?  What activity do you like most ? B. Presentation: + Pre - teach: - Teach the vocabulary: to enroll answer application form outdoor activities Checking: R.O.R + Listen and read the dialogue: - Set the scene. - Ask Ss to listen and read the dialogue at the same time. - Get them to work iun pairs and complete Nga’s particular. Answers: Name: Pham Mai Nga Home address: 5 Tran Phu Street. Phone number: Not available Date of birth: April 22 , 1989. Sex: Female. Interest: drawing, outdoor-activities, acting. - Ask Ss to check their understanding:  What’s her name ?  Where does she live ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span>  When was she born ?  What are her hobbies ? + Concept checking:  What is she like ? ( drawing)  What does she enjoy ? (acting)  What do we call drawing and acting ?(gerund)  What is the form of Gerund ? (V-ing)  When do we use gerund ? (after some verbs: like, love, hate, enjoy) Form:. Like, love, enjoy, hate + gerund (V-ing) Practice: Word Cue Drill: a. play soccer / volleyball b. watch TV / listen to music. c. read books / do homework. d. chat with friends / do the housework. e. cook meal / decorate the house. Example Exchange: What are your hobbies ? I like / love playing soccer / volleyball. - Ss practice on their own. 4. Consolidation: - Sum up the key points. 5. Homework: - Review the key points. - Do the Ex.1-2(page 38-39) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson-Speak.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span> P:23/10/2013. Unit 6: The young pioneers club Period 33: Lesson 2: Speak & Listen. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for favors and respond to favors. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to complete a song. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. unite peace III.Language focus. - Ask for favors and respond to favors. IV.Language skills. - To drill speaking Ss and listening skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Shark’s attack: - Give the word : Favor B. Presentation: * Pre - speaking: - Ask Ss the meaning of the word: favor.  What do you say to ask for a favor ? Can / could you help me ?  When do you ask for favor ? Need some help  How do you say to respond to favor ? Certainly , of course , sure , no problem. - Ask Ss to copy down * While - speaking: - Ss look at the dialogue between a receptionist and a tourist. - Ask Ss some questions to check.  What did the receptionist say ? May I help you ?  What for ? For offering assistant.  Other ways to offer ? Do you need any help ? Let me help you..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span> How do you say to respond ? Yes / No, thanks. * Post - speaking: - Ss practice with given situation. * Pre - listening: - Teach some new words: unite peace - Ask Ss to guess the words to fill in the gaps in the song. - Ask them to share with their partners. - Give feedback. * While - listening: - Ask Ss to listen to the song and fill in the missing words then share with their partners. - Play the tape three times. - Call some Ss to give out their answers. - T gives the right ones: peace - right - north - South - world - place - out - world. 4. Consolidation: * Post - listening: - Play the tape for Ss to practice sing along. - Call some Ss to sing the song aloud. 5. Homework: - Do the Ex3-4(page 40-41) 5(page 42) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson-Read. .

<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span> P:23/10/2013 T:. Unit 6: The young pioneers club Period 34: Lesson 3: Read. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about a youth organization - the Boy Scout of America (BSA). II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. encourage citizenship coeducational voluntery lead - led - led establish III.Language focus. - The simple present and past tense. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Jumbled words: Racchtaer: character. Iojn: join Mai: aim pexailn: explain Nessmsibuan: businessman thauolgh: although B. Presentation: * Pre - reading: - Teach the new words: encourage citizenship coeducational voluntery lead - led - led establish + Checking: Slap the board. - Give T/F statements prediction: 1. The Boy Scout of America is a youth organization. 2. Scouting began in America. 3. William Boyce is a businessman in London. 4. Boys and girls can join BSA. 5. The Scouting Association is the biggest voluntary youth organization in the world. - Give feedback. * While - reading: - Ask Ss to read the passage on P.57 and check their prediction. - Give the right answers. - Ask Ss to fill in the missing dates. - Give the answers: a. 1907 b. 1909 c. 1910 d. 1994.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span> - Ask Ss to do the Ex 2 on P.57. - Ss compare their answers with their partners. - Call some Ss to give their own answers. - Givefeedback. - Give the right answers: a. Scouting began in England in 1907. b. The meeting between a boy scout and Mr William Boyce led to the Scouts Association crossing the Atlantic in 1910. c. Girls can join in the Girls Guides Association and Camp Fire Boy and Girls. d. They are builing characters, good citizenship and personal fitness. - Ss work in groups. 4. Consolidation: * Post - reading: - Interview a member of the Boy Scout of America with an excellent S. 5. Homework: - Write the summary of the BSA. - Do the Ex 6(page 42-43) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson-Write..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span> P: 30/10/2013. Unit 6:The young pioneers club Period 35: Lesson 4: Write. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter about a future plan using “be going to”. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. raise a bank natural resources III.Language focus. - The future plan using “be going to”. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Revision of the “Be going to”: - Get Ss to make the sentence : I’m going to + V . The verbs have to begin with a letter from A to Z (accept - buy - clean - dust - explain - feed - go - hold - inform - .........) B. Presentation: * Pre - writing: - Teach the new words: raise a bank natural resources - Ss read the notice on P.58. - Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding. What do members of the Y & Y have to do in the recycling program ?  What is the purpose of the recycling program ? What other program can members of the Y & Y participate in ? - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer questions. - Give feedback and get some Ss to work in open pairs. - Ask Ss to complete the letter. - Give feedback. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her aunt and answer these questions:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span>  Why does Hoa look happy ?  What is she going to do in the environment month?  What are they doing to earn money for their school Y & Y ? * While - writing: - Ask Ss to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents. - Get ss to work in group of 4 or 5 to write a letter on a poster. 4. Consolidation: * Post - writing: - Move around the class and choose four letters from 4 groups. - Ask them to stick their letters on the board. - Get the hole class to read the four letters and correct them. 5. Homework: - Ask each S to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents. - Do the Ex 7(page 43) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson- Language focus..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span> P: 30/10/2013. Unit 6: The young pioneers club Period 36: Lesson 5: Language focus. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice with the Present Tense, the gerunds and the modals. II. Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. a rest house. an orphanage. III. Language focus. - The the Present Tense, the gerunds and the modals. IV. Language skills. - To drill Ss reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Brainstorming: Collect waste paper. help blind people The Y & Y programs. B. Presentation: a. Part 1: - Teach some new words: a rest house (n) an orphanage (n).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span> - Explain the ways to practice. When do they …... - On ……... Where do they ….. What time do they ….. - At …. - They start at …. - Ss practice in pairs. - Calls some pairs to practice aloud. - T corrects and gives some remarks. b. Part 2: - T presents the ways to practice. S + love/like(s) + V-ing - Call a good S to do first as model. - Ss practice part (a) individually. - Ask Ss to practice part (b) in pairs. - Call some pairs top practice. - T corrects. c. Part 3: - T reminds Ss some ways to ask for favors and assistance. - Ask Ss to practice with open dialogue. - Ask Ss to practice in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice aloud. - T corrects. 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss some key points. 5. Homework: - Review all key points to prepare for the Exam..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span> P: 30/10/2013 T:. Period 37: Revision. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice with all the tenses they have learnt II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III.Language focus. - The adverbs of manner and modal Should as an advice. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: String: English - home - e........... B. Presentation: I The Simple Present Tense: - uses: - express the habittual actions. - Form: +) S + V / Vs/es + O - ) S + don’t / doesn’t + V + O ? ) Do / Does + S + V + O ? - Examples: I go to school on foot. She washes her clothes everymorning. Nam doesn’t like sports very much. Do you like watching T.V ? II. The Present Progressive Tense: - Uses: - to express the action happening at the time of speaking. - Form: (+ ): S + am / is / are + V_ing + O. (- ): S + amnot / isn’t / aren’t + V_ing + O. (? ): Am / Is / Are + S + V_ing O ? - Examples: Are you going to Hanoi ? She isn’t studying now. I am listening to the music at the moment. III. The Present Perfect Tense: - Uses: to express the actions happened in the past but relate to the present..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span> - Form:. (+): S + have / has + VPP + O. (- ): S + haven’t / hasn’t + VPP + O. (? ): Have / Has + S + VPP + O ?. - Examples: I have taught English here for 7 years. She hasn’t written any letters since then. Have you ever heard about him ? IV. The Simple Past: - Uses : to express the actions happened. - Form: +) S + Ved + O - ) S + didn’t + V + O. ? ) Did + S + V + O ? - Examples: I watched T.V last night. She went to Ho Chi Minh City last year. They didn’t talk to eachother yesterday. Did he tell you about his birthday party ? * Matching: - Match these verbs with their past form: A B A 1.Run a.Ran 6.Fly 2. take b. was/ were 7. ride 3. go c. had 8. eat 4. have d. took 9. sit 5. be e. went 10. come V. The Simple Future Tense: - Uses: to express the actions that are going to happen. - Form: (+): S + will + V + O. (- ): S + won’t + V + O. (? ): Will + S + V + O ? - Examples: I will go to Hanoi tomorrow. She won’t come to Sapa this Summer. Will they write to her ? 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points. 5. Homework: - Review and do the Ex given.. B f.came g. ate h. rode i. sat j. flied.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span> P: 08/11/2013 Period 38: written test 2 T: Time allowance: 45’ I. Objectives: - To check Ss’ knowledge from untit 4 to unit 6 - Knowledge: Reported speech, prepositions of time, the past simple tense, the present tense with future meaning. - Vocabulary: About studying habits, Y & Y, our past. - Skills: Reading and writing. To do a written test (Writing, vocabulary & structure) II.Testing aids. - Papers III. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Check up - Check the preparation of Ss. 3.Testing time: - Time allowance: 45’ A. The matric . Recognizing. Low. Knowledge Verb form. 6. 5. answerText –. Reading. TL. TNKQ. TL. 4 2.5. 2. TNKQ. TL. 15 S 5M 50% 1. Text - answer. 1.5. TNKQ. Total. high. Tenses. TL. Preposition .... TNKQ. Vocabular, grammar. Applying. Understanding. 5S 2.5 M 25 %. 3 1.5 reported speech. 1. Writing. 5. 5S 2.5 M 25%. 2.5 Total. 13 S. 7S. 5S. 25 S.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span> 5 M 50%. B.Questions.. 2.5 M 25%. 2.5 M 25%. 10 M.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span> I. Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions. (2p) 1. I often play soccer …………….Sunday afternoon. 2. Our classes begin ……….7 o’clock 3. We should be there ………………………7.30 and 8.15 4. Her birthday is …………………… May. II. Choose the best answer to complete these sentences. (3p) 1. I know you worked really ……….this semester. (hardly/good/ bad/hard). 2. She asked me ………late. (not / not to be / not be / not being) 3. It’s cold outside. ………..you close the door, please? (Do / Are / Could / Why don’t) 4. She is studying hard ………pass the final exams. (for / in order to / so to / so that) 5. Nam hates ………..to the market. (to go / goes / go / going) 6. Can you fill ………this form for me? (on / in / for / of) III. Read the passage then decide if the following sentences are true (T) or false (F). (3) We are all destroying the earth. The seas and rivers are too dirty to swim in. There is so much smoke in the air that it is unhealthy to live many of world’s cities. We have cut down so many trees that there are no vast areas of wasteland (hoang m¹c) all over the world. As a result, farmers in parts of Africa can not grow enough to eat. In certain countries in Asia there is too little rice. Wild animals are quickly disappearing. Tigers are rare (hiÕm) in India now because we have killed too many. However, it is enough simply to talk about the problem. We must act now before it is too late to do anything about it. Join us now. Save the earth. This is too important to ignore (lê ®i) 1. The seas and rivers are polluted now 2. Smoke are harmful to human health 3. We have planted many trees now 4. In all over the world, farmers can not grow enough to eat 5. Wild animals are quickly disappearing 6. There are only a few tigers exist in India. IV. Change the following sentences into reported speech. (2p) 1. “Can you close the door, please” => He asked me 2. “you should learn harder” => Mrs. Thuy advised us 3. “Open your books, please” => She told us 4. “Don’t talk in class” => Our teacher told me C.Answers and marks. I. Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions. (2p) 1.on 2.at 3.between 4.in.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span> II. Choose the best answer to complete these sentences. (3p) 1. hard 2. not to be 3.could 4. in order to 5. going 6. in III.Read the passage then decide if the following sentences are true (T) or false (F). (3) 1.T 2.T 3.F 4.F 5.T 6.T IV. Change the following sentences into reported speech. (2p) 1. “Can you close the door, please” => He asked me to close the door 2. “you should learn harder” => Mrs. Thuy advised us to learn harder 3. “Open your books, please” => She told us to open our books 4. “Don’t talk in class” => Our teacher told me not to talk in class 4. Consolidation: - Collect all testing papers - Give some remarks. 5. Homework: - Revise the grammar points. - Prepare for the next lesson..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span> P: 09/11/2013 T:. Unit 7: My neighborhood Period 39: Lesson 1: Getting started & Listen and read. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about Na’s new neighbor. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. close by serve a pancake tasty III.Language focus. - The present perfect tense. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading and writing skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Give back the testing papers. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Getting started: - Ask Ss to match the names of places with the suitable words. * Answers: a. grocery b. stadium c. wet market d. drug store e. hairdresser’s f. swimming pool. B. Presentation: * Pre - reading: - Teach some new words: close by serve a pancake tasty + Checking: What and where. - Set the scene. - Give two guided questions: a. How long has Nam lived in that neighborhood ? b. Where does Na want to go ? - Ask Ss to listen and read silently the dialogue between Nam and Na, then ask them to answer the given questions. * While - reading: - Ask Ss to complete the sentence individually. - Ss compare their answers with their partners. - Give feedback. - T calls some Ss to give their answers. - T corrects and gives the right ones: a. new b. last week c. tired d. restaurant e. Hue f. pancakes.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span> - Give Ss some more questions about the content of the dialogue. a. How long has Nam lived there ? b. Is Na’s mother tired ? c. What kind of food does the restaurant serve ? d. What is the food like ? - Ask Ss to work in pairs, then call some pairs to practice aloud. - T gives some remarks on Ss’ practice. 4. Consolidation: * Post - reading: - Ask Ss to write a passage about their neighbor hood by answering the following questions: a. How long have you lived in your neighborhood ? b. Do you like it ? Why ?(people, environment......) c. Is ther a restaurant/ post office/ market/ bank/ shop/ in your neighborhood? d. How do you do to keep your neighbor hood clean ? - Ss practice, T moves around the class and helps students. 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to complete their writing. - Prepare the next lesson- Speak. - Do the Ex 1-2(page 44) in workbook.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span> P:09/11/2013 T:. Unit 7: My neighborhood Period 40: Lesson 2: Speak & Listen.. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about how to send a parcel or letters and know what Na is going to do on the weekend by listening. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. air-mail surface mail charge III.Language focus. - Be going to. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss speaking and listening skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction.. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Chatting: - Show a letter and ask Ss some questions: What is this ? (a letter) Where can I post it ?(at the post office) How can I post it ?(stick a stamp on it) How much is it ?(800 dong) Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ? (Yes, of course) Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ? - Introduce the new lesson. B. Presentation: * Presentation: - Teach some new words: air-mail surface mail charge + Checking: R.O.R - Set the scene. - Give some questions: a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel air mail or surface mail ? Why ? b. What is the weight of her parcel ? c. How much does she pay ? - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find out the answers. - Get Ss to work in pairs to compare their answers. - Call on some Ss to answer in front of the class. * Practice: - Call on a S to play the role of Mrs. Kim and practice the dialogue with the T(clerk). - Call on some pairs to practice the dialgue..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span> - Ask Ss to practice. * Further practice: - Set the scene and ask Ss to make the dialogue. - Elicit and encourage Ss to make the dialogue themselves. - Divide the class into three groups, each prepares one dialogue. * Pre - listening: - Ask Ss to look at 4 advertisements of “What’s on this week ?” and guess the Ss to guess what is in the blanks2 - 3 - 4. - Set the scene& ask Ss to listen to the tape and fill in the blanks in each advertisements. * While - listening: - Ss listen to the tape three times and give the answers. - Give feedback. + Answers: a. The new comer. b. Town Ground. c. English Speaking contest. d. Culture house. - Ss read the statements in the Ex 2. - Get Ss to guess which is true, which is false and which has no information. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again to do the Ex 2. - Ask them to share their ideas with their friends. - Give feedback. + Answers: a. T b. F c. F d. T e. T f. N I - Give comprehension questions: a. Does Na like movies ? b. Why won’t she go to see the film “The new comer.” ? c. Why won’t she go to the photo exhibition ? d. Who will go to the soccer match ? e. What time does the match start ? 4. Consolidation: * Post - listening: - Ask Ss to work in groups to talk what Na is going to do this weekend. - Call some volunteers to present. - Give some remarks. 5. Homework: - Write what Na is going to do . - Do the Ex5(page 46) in workbook. - Do the Ex3-4(page 44-45) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson. Read..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span> P:14/11/2013. Unit 7: My neighborhood Period 41: Lesson 4: Read. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the passage about a new shopping mall. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. a roof convenient a selection available a mall a resident III.Language focus. - Be going to. IV.Language skills. - To drill Ss reading skill. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction.. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Guessing the words: A place where you can buy everything. (supermarket) A place where you can buy vegetables and fruits. (grocery store) A place where you can buy book. (Book store) A place where you can come to see the movies. (movie theater) B. Presentation: * Pre - reading: - Teach some new words: a roof convenient a selection available a mall a resident + Checking: What and Where: - Set the scene. - Ask Ss to think about the convenient of the mall. + Possible answers: - wide selection of goods. - lower price. - buy many things at the smae time. - have fun or relax while shopping. * While - reading: - Ask Ss to read the text silently and compare their ideas or get more information. - Give feedback. - Have Ss look at the Ex 1..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span> - Make sure they understand the statements. - Get Ss to read the text again and decide which is T, which is F. - Give the right ones: a. F b. F c. T d. F e. T - Have Ss correct the false statements. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the given questions on P. 68. - Call some Ss to give the right answers. 4. Consolidation: * Post - reading: - Give a situaion and ask Ss to discuss it. “ Do you want to have a new mall in your neighborhood ? If there is one, what will happen to the residents ?” 5. Homework: - Do the Ex6(page 46-47) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson. Write..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span> P:14/11/2012. Unit 7: My neighborhood Period 42: Lesson 4: Write. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a notice and to use some adjectives to make comparisons. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words about the model notice. III.Language focus. - Write the model notice IV.Language skills. - Writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - During the lesson. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: *Pelmanism: - Ss turn over the cards, if they match eachother(cheap - expensive) they get 1 mark. - Go on untill all the cards are turned over, the team which gets more marks wins. Different Cheap Expensive Long Same Modern. Short. Big. Small. B. Presentation: * Pre- writing: - Set the scene, then get Ss to read the notice and answer some questions to check. - Give some guided questions:  Why are the residents and store owners on Tran Phu Street going to hold a meeting ?  When will they hold a meeting ?  Where will they hold the meeting ? - Let Ss know the ways to write a notice, not write full sentences. - Ask Ss to read the passage 2 on P.68. - Ask some questions to check Ss’ understanding and get them to use short answers:  What is the English Speaking Club going to hold ?  Where and when will it be held ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span>  What time ?  Who is the person to contact ? * While - writing: - Get Ss to write the notice individually. - Monitor and help them. 4. Consolidation: * Post - writing: - Get Ss to share with their partners. - Check some notices and correct. - Write the model notice on the board. The school English Speaking Club Holding a speaking contest to celebrate teacher’s day. Date: November 15. Time: 7.30 to 10.00pm. Place: Hall 204, Building G. Please contact Ms. Tran Thi Thu Hang of Class 8H at the above address for more information. 5. Homework: - Do Ex 7(page 47-48) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson. Language focus..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span> P: 15/11/2013. Unit 7: My neighborhood Period 43: Lesson 5: Language focus. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the Present Perfect Tense. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. For / Since: For + length of time. Since + starting point . III.Language focus. - The Present Perfect Tense. IV.Language skills. - Writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - During the lesson. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Matching: Be see collect go worked Lived do seen eat attended Write been written eaten work Attend done live collect gone - Get Ss to repeat in chorus and remember the past participles of irregular verbs. B. Presentation: * Presentation: - Set the scene, then give Ss an open dialogue between Nam and Na to complete it. - Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue and ask some Ss to practice in pairs.  Form: have / has + past participle.  Use: to talk about ST which started in the past and continues up to the present.  For / Since: For + length of time. Since + starting point . * Practice: 1. Drill 1: Substitution Drill: - Ask Ss to look at Ex 2 on P.69 and decide which is the length of time and which is a starting point. - T reads out a phrase, Ss add Since or For. - Go on untill Ss can remember how to use Since / For. 2. Drill 2:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span> - Give the cues written on cards and ask Ss to make full sentences. T corrects. a. I / live / here / last week. b. We / not eat / in that restaurant / 2 years. c. I / not see / her / yesterday. d. They / attend / Quang Trung School / last year. e. My Dad / work / for his Company / 20 years. f. Ba / collect / stamps / 1995. 4. Consolidation: * Production: - Ask Ss to do Ex 4 on P.70 in pairs. - Give feedback. - Get Ss to work in pairs to practice the conversation between Ba and Tom. 5. Homework: - Ss do the Ex 3 on P.69 into their notebook. - Prepare the next lesson. Unit 8: Getting started & listen and read..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span> P: 21/11/2013. Period 44: Test correction. I. Objectives: - To correct the written test 2 - Grammar: The simple present tense, comparison, adjectives, prepositions. - Keys and points. II.Vocabulary. - School, friend and personnal information III.Language focus. - The simple present tense, the present progessive tense, prepositions IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - During the lesson. 3. Testing correction: Answers and marks. I. Choose the best answer to complete these sentences. (0.25*10=2.5) 1-C 2-A. 3-B. 4- B 5-C. 6-C. 7-C. 8-A. 9-C. 10-C. II. Read the passage then decide if the following sentences are true (T) or false (F); answer the questions (0.5*5=2.5) 1. True (T) or false (F) a-T b-F 2. Answer the questions 1. Y&Y participate in a recycleing program.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span> 2. Collect used glass, paper and cans, and send them for recycling 3. Yes, they do III. Compete these sentences with the corect form of the verbs (0.5*5=2.5) 1. Playing 2. watching 3. driving 4. reading IV. Change the following sentences into reported speech. (2p) 1. He told us to shut the door 2. The doctor told me to eat more fruits and vegetables 3. She asked me to speak more slowly 4. She asked me to phone her at 5 5. He advised you to go home as soon as possible 4. Consolidation: - Collect all testing papers - Give some remarks. 5. Homework: - Revise the grammar points. - Prepare for the next lesson..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span> P: 21/11/2013 Unit 8:Country life and city life Period 45: Lesson 1: Getting started & listen and read I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the country life and city life. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. a relative peaceful permanently accessible medical facilities. III.Language focus. - Talk about the country life and city life. IV.Language skills. - Listening, reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook, cassette and tape. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction.. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Chatting: - Talk to Ss about life in the city and life in the country by asking some questions:  Where do you live ?  Do you want to live in the city ? why ?  Do you want to live in the country ? why ? B. Presentation: * Pre - reading: I. Pre teach - Teach some new words: a relative peaceful permanently accessible medical facilities. + Checking: What and where. II. Brainstorming:(Getting started): - Get Ss to talk about the city life and country life, the words used in the box of Getting stared may help: noisy quiet City life. + Possible answers: - tall buidings - plenty kinds of food. Country life. - beautiful views - fresh food.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span> - pollutted air - fresh air - traffic jams - friendly - entertainment - peaceful - busy - ........... * While - reading: - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Na and Hoa an dcompare their ideas. - Givefeedback and get more information. 1. Comprehension questions: - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in Ex 2 on P.73. - Call some Ss to give the right answers: a. She has been to Kim Lien Village. b. She was there for the weekend. c. It is peaceful and quiet and there is nothing to do. d. There is no libraries, no movies, no supermarket, no zoos........ e. Country life is becoming better. Many remote areas are getting electricity.People can now have things like refrigerators and TV, medical facilities are more accessible. - Ask some Ss to practice the dialogue. 4. Consolidation: * Post - reading: 2. Discussion: - Divide the class into 4 groups. 2 groups include Ss who prefer the city life and the others include Ss who prefer the country life. - Ask Ss to work in groups to answer the questions: Do you prefer the city life or the country life ? Why ? - Ask 4 pioneers from 4 groups to show their ideas before class. 5. Homework: - Ss write a short passage about why they prefer the city life or the country life - Prepare the next lesson.Speak - Do Ex 1-2(page 49-50) in workbook..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span> P: 21/11/2013. Unit 8: Country life and city life Period 46: Lesson 2: Speak & Listen. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice speaking about the changes of a place. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. “get” and “become” III.Language focus. - The Present Progressive Tense. IV.Language skills. - Speaking and Listening V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction.. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: * Matching: A Do Watch Go Clean Play Have Phone Speak. B To violen The house Table tennis My homework A meeting A program To mom My aunt, Mrs.Hang. B. Presentation: * Presentation: - Set the scene, then ask Ss to make a sentence about her health. - Explain the form & use of the Present Progressive Tense: Form: am / is / are + V-ing Use: used to describe the change with “get” and “become” * Practice: + Drill: - Prepare 6 cards with cues given: a. The boys / get / tall. b. The old men / become / weak. c. It/ become / dark..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span> d. The weather / get / cold. e. The students / get / better. f. The school yard / become / cleaner. - Model first two cues, the whole class repeat chorally, then some Ss read out. - Give some remarks. * Production: 1. Speaking 1: - Ss look at two pictures on p.73 and talk to their partners about changes of the town. The words in the box under the pictures may help. - Write the word prompts on the board so that Ss can speak easily. - Get Ss to work in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice. 2. Speaking 2: - Ask Ss to work in groups and talk about the changes in their home village. - Call on some volunteers to show their ideas in front of the class. - Give some remarks. * Pre -listening: - Set the scene. - Ss listen and read through the unfilled dialogue. - Ask Ss to guess the words to fill in the gaps in the dialogue. - Ss compare with their friends. - Give feedback. - T writes all Ss’guessing on the board. * While - listening: - Play the tape for Ss to listen twice. - Ss check their guessing. - Play the tape once again, pause at each information sentence for Ss to check. - Ask Ss to give their answers aloud. - Give the right answers: 1: that 2: this 3: It’s 4: Where 5:from 6: coming 7: next week 8: arriving 9: Thursday 10:late 11: afternoon 12: speak 13: my 14: get 4. Consolidation: * Post - listening: - Play the tape once again for Ss tolisten through. - Ask Ss to practice reading the dialogue aloud in pairs. 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to write some sentences, using Present ProgressiveTense to descibe the changes in their school. - Do Ex3- 4-5(page50-51) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson. Read..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span> P:28/11/2013. Unit 8: Country life and city life Period 47: Lesson 4: Read. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text about one of the social prblems.. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. rural urban stain typhoon drought struggle migrant increase III.Language focus. - The Present Progressive Tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction.. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: * Jumbled words: Fulentipl: plentiful taneru: nature Laputipoon: population viroped: provide: facilities. B. Presentation: * Pre - reading: I. Pre - teach vocabulary: rural urban drought struggle + Checking: What and Where.. loofd: flood suertl: result. roestdy: destroy ciliestiaf:. stain migrant. typhoon increase. II. Brainstorming: - Ask Ss to think of the difficulties of farmers’ life. Typhoon Flood difficulties of farmers’ life. get little money.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span> + Possible answers: droughts the weather hard work no vacation lack of clean water/ electricity insects destroy harvest - Ask Ss to guess how farmers deal with difficulties. - Get Ss to work in groups to guess. * While - reading: - Let Ss read the text silently and answer the question: What do many farmers do to solve their problems? They move to the city so that they can get well-paid jobs. III. Gap - filling: - Ss work in goups to complete the summary on p.75, using the information from the text. - Give feedback. - Give the right ones: 1. leaving 2. Home 3. City 4. Rural 5. City 6. Problems 7. Schools 8. Hospitals 9. Problem 10. World IV. Finding the words: - Ask Ss to do Ex 2 on p. 75. - Let them read the text again and work with their partners. - Call some Ss to give their answers. - Correct and give the right ones: a) rural b) plentiful c) increase d) strain e) tragedy f) urban 4. Consolidation: * Post - reading: - Give a situation: If you were a Minister, what would you do for farmers ? - Ask Ss to work in groups and discuss. + Possible answers:  Build streets, theater, stadium in the country.  Build school, hospitals.  Provide clean water, electricity, facilities.  Build factory. 5. Homework: - Write 5 things that the government should do for the rural areas. - Do Ex6(page51) in workbook. - Prepare the next lesson. Write..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span> P: 28/11/2013. Unit 8: Country life and city life Period 48: Lesson 5: Write. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write letters to their friends about their neighborhood. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Heading. Writer’s address. Body of the letter. Closing.. Opening.. III.Language focus. - The Simple Present Tense. IV.Language skills. - Writing V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction.. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Revision: - Ask Ss to put the outline for an informal letter in the correct order written on 6 cards. - Write on the BB for Ss to remember it easily: 1. Heading: Writer’s address. Date Dear...., 2. Opening..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span> 3. Body of the letter. 4. Closing. B. Presentation: * Pre- writing: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the given questions. - Give feedback. - Make clear the task. * While - writing: - Ask Ss to write letters to friends about their neighborhood. - Let Ss write individually. - Ask them to compare with their partners. - Sellect some good writings to read them aloud. 4. Consolidation: * Post - writing: - Choose some letters to correct in front of the class, and give some remarks. 5. Homework: - Write the letter into their notebook. - Prepare the next lesson. Language focus. - Do Ex7(page54) in workbook..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span> 28/11/2013. Unit 8: Country life and city life Period 49:Lesson 5: Language focus. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use comparative and superlative adjectives; the Present Progressive Tense to talk about the future. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words about irregular adjectives. III.Language focus. - The Present Progressive Tense,The comparative and superlatives IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction.. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: Matching: A Do Watch Go Clean Play Have Phone Speak. B To violen The house Table tennis My homework A meeting A program To mom My aunt, Mrs.Hang. B. Presentation: I. The Present Progressive Tense: - Ask Ss to use the suitable verbs in the Present Progressive Tense to complete the dialogue in the Ex 2 p.78. - Get Ss to work in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice the dialogue before the class and T corrects. + Answers: a. am playing b. are doing c. am watching d. am going e. are cleaning f. am having II. The comparative and superlatives: - Ask Ss to think of as many long and short adjectives as possible. - Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and superlative adjectives:  Comparative : Short Adj - er + than + object.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span> More + long Adj + than + object.  Superlative: The + Short Adj- est The most + long Adj.  Irregular adjectives: Good/ well - better - the best Bad - worse - the worst Many - more - the most Little - less - the least - Ask Ss to do Ex 4 on p.79. - Give some examples. a. The air in the country is fresher than in the city. b. The medical facilities in the city are more accessible than in the country. - Move around the class and help Ss write comparison sentences. - Let Ss read aloud on of their sentence they have made. - Let Ss make any sentence they want, only focus on the structures, not on the meaning. - Ask Ss to do the Ex 5 on p. 79. - Ask them to read the advertisement then ask them some questions to check their understanding:  What are advertised ?  How old are they ?  How much do we pay per month ? - Ask ss to practice on their own. - Call some Ss to give the right answers. 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points. 5. Homework: - Review all key grammar points to prepare for the revision lesson..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span> P: 28/11/2013. Period 50: Revision. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice with all the tenses they have learnt. II.Vocabulary. -Review vocabulary of unit 1,2,3. III.Language focus. - The Simple Present Tense ,The Present Progressive Tense, The Present Perfect Tense, The Simple Past and The Simple Future Tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date: ………………….. Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent:………………………………….……… 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: String: English - home - e........... B. Presentation: I. The Simple Present Tense: - Uses: - Express the habittual actions. - Form: +) S + V / Vs/es + O - ) S + don’t / doesn’t + V + O ? ) Do / Does + S + V + O ? - Examples: I go to school on foot. She washes her clothes everymorning. Nam doesn’t like sports very much. Do you like watching T.V ? II. The Present Progressive Tense: - Uses: - to express the action happening at the time of speaking. - Form: (+ ): S + am / is / are + V_ing + O. (- ): S + amnot / isn’t / aren’t + V_ing + O. (? ): Am / Is / Are + S + V_ing O ? - Examples: Are you going to Hanoi ? She isn’t studying now. I am listening to the music at the moment. III. The Present Perfect Tense: - Uses: to express the actions happened in the past but relate to the present..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span> - Form:. (+): S + have / has + VPP + O. (- ): S + haven’t / hasn’t + VPP + O. (? ): Have / Has + S + VPP + O ?. - Examples: I have taught English here for 7 years. She hasn’t written any letters since then. Have you ever heard about him ? IV. The Simple Past: - Uses : to express the actions happened. - Form: +) S + Ved + O - ) S + didn’t + V + O. ? ) Did + S + V + O ? - Examples: I watched T.V last night. She went to Ho Chi Minh City last year. They didn’t talk to eachother yesterday. Did he tell you about his birthday party ? V. The Simple Future Tense: - Uses: to express the actions that are going to happen. - Form: (+): S + will + V + O. (- ): S + won’t + V + O. (? ): Will + S + V + O ? - Examples: I will go to Hanoi tomorrow. She won’t come to Sapa this Summer. Will they write to her ? * Exercises I . Give the correct form of the verbs . 1p 1. I ( go )…………….. to school by bike. 2. My school ( have )………………… twenty classrooms … 3. ………………There ( be ) a river near your house ? 4. Phong ( watch ) …………………TV after school . 5. What time …………. Thu ( go )………………. to bed ? _She ( go )………………… to bed at ten o’clock . 6. ……………..your father ( work ) …………..in a factory ? 7. My mother ( not go )………………….. to work on Sunday . 8. Lan ( watch )………………….. TV now . 9. I ( have ) ………………………….breakfast at six o’clock . 10.They ( not go )……………………………. to school by bike . 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points. 5. Homework: - Review and do the Ex given..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span> P:09/12/2012 T:. Period 51: Revision. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice in the structure using adv “enough”, the prepositions of time, and the comparison. II.Vocabulary. -Review vocabulary of unit 4,5,6. III.Language focus. - The structure: to be + adj + enough + to + V, Prepositions of time and The comparison. IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25 Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Warm- up: String: English - home - e........... B. Presentation: I. The structure: to be + adj + enough + to + V. - Present the way to practice. - Give examples: The water is warm enough for us to swim. The questions are easy enough for them to do. - Give Ex for Ss to practice. II. Prepositions of time: - Ask Ss to list the prepositons of place they have learnt. - Give some cues for Ss to practice: ........... Monday. ............ 3.00 nd ............ Mon 2 ............. winter. III. The comparison: 1. The comparative: - Form: + with short adjectives: S + be + adjective-er + than + O + with long adjective: S + be + more + long adjective + than + O. - Examples:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span> Nam is taller than Hoa. This dress is more expensive than that dress. 2. The superlative: - Form: + with short adjectives: S + be + the + short adjective-est. + with long adjectives: S + be + the most + long adjectives. + Execptions: good - better - the best bad - worse - the worst little - less - the least many - more - the most. 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points. 5. Homework: - Review all to prepare for the Exam..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span> P:16/12/2012 T:. Period 52: Revision. I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the structures and the tenses they have learnt to do exercises. II.Vocabulary. - Review vocabulary of unit 7,8. III.Language focus. - The simple present or the present continuous tense, Prepositions of time and The comparison. IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Presentation: * Exercises. I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense: A.Albert Maltz was a progressive American writer. He (be) …… born in 1980. He (write) …… His first play “Peace on Earth” in 1943. It was against wars, so the American police (arrest) …… him and (put) …………… him in prison in 1950. B. Ha (come) … back a moment ago and (turn) …… the TV on very loudly. My son (sleep) … then, so I (tell) …her to turn if off. C. Last Friday was a holiday. I didn’t have to go to school. I (sleep)… a little later than asual. Around ten, may friend Harry (come) … over to my apartment.We (pack) ……. a picnic basket and then (take) … the bus to Forest Park. We (spend)…… most of the day there. II. Use the present or the present continuous tense. a. It’s 6.00 p.m. Marry is at home. She (have) …dinner. She always (have) … dinner with her family around six o’clock. b. Jang (speak) … Chinese. Chinese is his native language, but right now he (speak) ……English. c. Tom is very untidy. He always (leave) … his things all over the place. d. The train is never late. It always (leave) …on time. e. (at a party) usually I (enjoy) … Parties but I (not/ enjoy ) … this one very much. f. “What your mother (do) … ?” “She a doctor but she (not/ work) … at the moment.”.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span> III.Read the reading below carefully, then supply the correct tense of the verbs. Dennis Heal is a politician. He (go) ……. to Oxford University in 1950 and (become) ……… a member of parliament for the Labour Party in 1957. He (be) … an MP since then. He (write) … three story books including his autobiography. He is married to the artist, Ann Heal, and they (have) …… two children. They (live) …… in Oxford for 15 years, then (move) …… to London in 1970. They now (live) …in Cadogan Square in central London. IV.Put these verbs into the correct form, present continuous or present simple . 1. Air (consist) ……………………… mainly of nitrogen and opxygen. 2. Hanh used to drink o lot of coffee but these days she (prefer) …………… tea. 3. We (think) … you should sell your car. You (not/ use) ……… it very often. 4. He (think) … of selling his car. Would he be interested in buying it? 5. She told us her name but we ( not/ remember) ………………………. It now. 6. John say he’s 70 years old but nobody (believe) ………………… him. 7. Who is that woman ? Why she (look)………………….. at me? 8. Who is that girl? What she (want) ……………………….? 9. Don’t put that dictionary away. We (need) …………………………. It. 10. Don’t put those dictionaries away. We (use) ……………………… them. *Answers. I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense: a. was, wrote, arrested, put b. came, turned, was sleeping, told c. slept, came, packed, took, spent II. Use the present or the present continuous tense. a. is having, has b. speaks, is speaking c. is always leaving (always leaves is also possible) d. always leaves e. enjoy, am not enjoying f. does… do, is not working III.Read the reading below carefully, then supply the correct tense of the verbs. went, became, has been, wrote, have, lived, moved, live IV.Put these verbs into the correct form, present continuous or present simple . 1.consists 6. believes 2. prefers 7. is she looking 3. think, don’t use 8. does she want 4. is thinking 9. need 5. don’t remember 10. are using 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points. 5. Homework: - Review and re-do exercises..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span> P: 16/12/2012 T:. Period 53: TEST FOR The first term. Since or for. PrepositionTenseComparison. Vocabulary , grammar and pronunciati on. Since or for. I. The aims. - To test students’ knowledge about the first term. - Knowledge: Prepositions of time, the past simple tense, the present perfect tense - Vocabulary: Learnt vocabulary from unit one to unit 8. - Skills: Reading and writing. A. The matric . Applying Recognizing Understandin Total Low high g Knowledge TNK TN TNK TNKQ TL TL TL TL Q KQ Q. 21 S 6 MS 60%. 6. 2 1. 1 Read and answer. 3. 2. Reading. 4S 2 MS 20 %. 3 Writing. Total. 8S 4 MS. 5S 4 MS. Rewrite. Rewrite. 3. 2. 2. 1. 1 4S 2 MS. 4S 2 MS 20 % 29 S 10 M.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span> 40%. 40%. 20%. II. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25 Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Check up - Check the preparation of Ss. 3.Testing time: - Time allowance: 45’ B.Questions. I. Complete the sentences. Put for or since into each gap. (2p) 1. He has been in Thailand …………………………………………………… May. 2. She has lived in Dong Linh ………………………………..……………… 1999. 3. My father has worked for this company ………………………10 years. 4. I’ve read this novel …………………………………………………………3 hours. II. Choose the best answer to complete these sentences.(3p) 1. They have studied …………………………………six o’clock. (for / since / at / to) 2. My mother is ……..….tired …..…….cook tonight. (enough…to / too…to / so…that / very…to) 3. The new shopping mall is quite ……………...the present shopping area. (different from / the same / like to / similar) 4. ………have you lived in Thai Ninh? – For 20 years. (when / where / how / how long) 5. She has ………….…over 30 pages since yesterday. (write / wrote / written / writen) 6. The children are old enough to look after ………………….. ( themselves / ourselves / herself / myself) III. Read the passage. Then answer the questions (3p) Hello! My name is David. I work for a construction company. I have worked for this company for 5 years. We build roads, bridges and thing like that. At the moment my company is producing a plan for a new motorway. I usually work in the roads department, but this month I am working in the department that builds bridges. So my whole working day is different just now. I normally spend a lot of time outdoors because I have to go to the construction sites. But with this new project I spend a lot of time in the workshop. 1. What is his name? 2. How long has he worked for his construction company? 3. What is his company doing at the moment?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span> IV. Write full sentences using the given words. (2p) 1. I / visit / my grandparents / this Sunday. 2. He / go / school / on foot / everyday. 3. Where / you / live? 4. I / live / a house / Thai Ninh / my parents. IV. Answer keys and points I. Complete the sentences. Put for or since into each gap. (2p) 0,5*4=2 1. He has been in Thailand since May. 2. She has lived in Dong Linh since1999. 3. My father has worked for this company for 10 years. 4. I’ve read this novel for 3 hours. II. Choose the best answer to complete these sentences.(3p) 0,5*6=3 1. They have studied ………six o’clock. (for / since / at / to) 2. My mother is ….tired ….cook tonight. (enough…to / too…to / so…that / very…to) 3. The new shopping mall is quite ….the present shopping area. (different from / the same / like to / similar) 4. ……have you lived in Thai Ninh? – for 20 years. (when / where / how / how long) 5. She has ……over 30 pages since yesterday. (write / wrote / written / writen) 6. The children are old enough to look after .... ( themselves / ourselves / herself / myself) III. Read the passage. Then answer the questions (3p) 1*3=3 1. What is his name? => His name is David. 2. How long has he worked for his construction company? => He has worked for his construction company for 5 years ( for 5 years). 3. What is his company doing at the moment? => At the moment his company is producing a plan for a new motorway. IV. Write full sentences using the given words.( Dïng tõ gîi ý viÕt c©u ®Çy đủ) (2p) 0,5*4=2 1. I / visit / my grandparents / this Sunday. => I am visiting my grandparents this Sunday 2. He / go / school / on foot / everyday. => He goes to school on foot everyday 3. Where / you / live? => Where do you live? 4. I / live / a house / Thai Ninh / my parents..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span> => I live in a house in Thai Ninh with my parents. 4. Collecting. - When the time is out teacher collects all the paper carefully. 5. Homework - Prepare the next lesson..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span> Pre:16/12/2012 T:. Period 54: test CORRECTION. I.Objectives: - During the lesson Ss will be able to realizetheir weakness and how to improve their skills. II. Teaching aids. -Papers. III. Teaching procedures: 1. Class organization. Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25 Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test. - Ask ss to give the main form structures in the written test. 3. New lesson : IV. Answer keys and points I. Complete the sentences. Put for or since into each gap. (2p) 0,5*4=2 1.He has been in Thailand since May. 2.She has lived in Dong Linh since1999. 3.My father has worked for this company for 10 years. 4. I’ve read this novel for 3 hours. II. Choose the best answer to complete these sentences.(3p) 0,5*6=3 1.They have studied ………six o’clock. (for / since / at / to) 2.My mother is ….tired ….cook tonight. (enough…to / too…to / so…that / very…to) 3.The new shopping mall is quite ….the present shopping area. (different from / the same / like to / similar) 4……have you lived in Thai Ninh? – for 20 years. (when / where / how / how long) 5.She has ……over 30 pages since yesterday. (write / wrote / written / writen) 6.The children are old enough to look after .... ( themselves / ourselves / herself / myself) III. Read the passage. Then answer the questions (3p) 1*3=3 Hello! My name is David. I work for a construction company(c«ng ty x©y dùng). I have worked for this company for 5 years. We build roads, bridges and thing like that. At the moment my company is producing a plan for a new motorway. I usually work in the roads department, but this month I am working in the department that builds bridges. So my whole working day is different just now. I normally spend a lot of time outdoors, because I have to go to the.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span> contruction sites. But with this new project I spend a lot of time in the workshop. 1.What is his name? => His name is David. 2.How long has he worked for his construction company? => He has worked for his construction company for 5 years ( for 5 years). 3.What is his company doing at the moment? => At the moment his company is producing a plan for a new motorway. IV. Write full sentences using the given words.( Dïng tõ gîi ý viÕt c©u ®Çy đủ) (2p) 0,5*4=2 1.I / visit / my grandparents / this Sunday. => I am visiting my grandparents this Sunday 2.He / go / school / on foot / everyday. => He goes to school on foot everyday 3.Where / you / live? => Where do you live? 4.I / live / a house / Thai Ninh / my parents. => I live in a house in Thai Ninh with my parents. 4. Consolidation - Remind Ss some common mistakes they have 5. Home work. -Note the way to have better written test. - Prepare new lesson - Unit 9:Getting started & Listen and read..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span> P: 04/01/2014 Unit 9: A first-aid course T: ………………. Period 55 : Lesson 1: Getting started & Listen and read I. Objectives : -To help Ss to get acquainted with the new topic : The first -aid. To help Ss to know more about the real situations which require first -aid.And how to do the fist -aid. - To drill speaking, reading , and listening skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Emergency: cÊp cøu. Ambulance: xe cÊp cøu Conscious –uncoscious : tØnh t¸o Bleed: ch¶y m¸u Wound: vÕt th¬ng keep awake = conscious III.Language focus. - The simple past tense. IV.Language skills. - Listening and reading V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ………………………………… 2. Oral test : - Ask Ss to retell the main grammartical points that they have learnt in 8 units: units 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ? 3. New lesson : A. Getting started . - Introduce some information about the lesson.Then hang the picture on the board. Ask Ss to read some new words. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to match the situation with the pictures - Ask Ss to give the answers. + a girl has aburn on her arm: -ease the burn with ice,or cold water pack, and cover with some ointment and cover with a sterile bandage. +a boy has a bad cut on his leg : - wash the cut with alcohol to sterilize it ,then cover it with a bandage. + a girl has a nose bleed: - let her stand straight and raise her head behind, use some absorbent cotton. + aboy has a bee sting: - wash the sting with alcohol, then rub some ointment on it . B. Presentation - Introduce the topic of the lesson. - Ask Ss to describe the situation. Describe the girl ‘ s situation;Fell of the bike , have a bad cut on her head - Explain the exercise ‘s order. -Play the tape 2 times. - Give some new words.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span> Emergency: cÊp cøu. Ambulance: xe cÊp cøu Conscious - uncoscious : tØnh t¸o Bleed: ch¶y m¸u Wound: vÕt th¬ng keep awake = conscious C. Practice . - Ask the Ss to read the diologue in silience and note down the “ select the topic “. -Ask the Ss to read the passage again and do the exercise . - Ask the Ss to give the answer by writing down the answer on the board . - Give the correct answer . - Ask the Ss to practice in pairs to discuss the corect answer.And read the answer .- Ask the Ss to read the paragraph aloud and traslate into the vietnamese D. Production . -Ask the Ss to work in pairs to dicuss again the situations in the “Getting started. - Ask some pairs to practice in front the rest. 4.Consolidation : - Ask the Ss to retell the main content of the lesson : “ How to do the firstaids”, and how to protect yourself by the first- aids. 5. Home work : - Read the paragraph , write the new words. - Do the exercise 1 page 55- work book. - Prepare : Unit 9- Speak & Listen. P: 04/01/2014 T: ………………... Unit 9 : A first-aid course Period 56 : Lesson 2: Speak & Listen.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span> I.Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the first aid by using the simple future to make request , offers and promises and know more about the first aid by using the simple future to make request , offers and promises - To drill speaking and litening skill. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. +Stretcher : c¸i c¸ng + Crutchers : c¸i n¹ng + Scale :c¸i c©n + Eye chart : b¶ng ®o thÞ lùc +Wheelchair: xe l¨n III.Language focus. - Requests, Offers and Promises IV.Language skills. - Speaking and Listening V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ………………………………… 2. Oral test - Read the dialogue, and answer the questions ? - Do the exercise1 (page: 55 ) 3. New lesson A. Warm up: Ask the Ss to play the Net work The first - aid situation B. Pre- speaking : -Introduce the situation. - Introduce the phrases to practice speaking . -Explain the phrases to the Ss.. Requests Can/ couldyou......? Will/ wouldyou...........?. Offers. Promises. Would you like....? What can I get for you ? Shall I ......? Will / would you have.........? Can I get you........?. Iwill.......I promise. I promise, I will......... I promise I wo’nt........ I promise to............... C. while -speaking -Ask the Ss to work in group of two to practice the requests, and responses to the requests. - Call some pairs to practice infront the rest. Sister : Shall I get you some medicine? Boy: Yes, please ./ That would be nice.No, I ‘ fine. A: Can you get me some bandage? B: Sure. A Would you like me to get you some medicine? B: That would be nice. Boy: I promise I wo’nt play soccer in the house again..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span> Mother: I hopen so/ Do’nt forget. - Check the mistake if necesary. D.Post – speaking. - Ask the Ss to practice more the different situations given. a. A: It’s very hot here . ( Request ) Could you open the windows, please ? B: All right. A: You look tired and hungry. ( offer ................................................? B: No, thanks. A. Pre- listening - Introduce the content of the listening, and listening’s order. - Ask the Ss to look at the picture and name the thing in English - Provide the new words: +Stretcher : c¸i c¸ng + Crutchers : c¸i n¹ng + Scale :c¸i c©n + Eye chart : b¶ng ®o thÞ lùc +Wheelchair: xe l¨n -Read the new words in the chorus. B. While –listening - Play the tape three times/ ask the Ss to work inpairs to list the things they hear in the correct order. Ask some pairs to give the answer. - Play the tape once more and ask the Ss to check the listening. A.Ambulance E. Eye chart C. Wheelchair F. Scale D. Crutches. G. Stretcher. * the correct order in the tape: F- B- D- A- E- C. C.Post- listening. -Give the extra exercise and ask the Ss to work in pairs to complete. * Put the words in the box into four groups Headache, heart, leg , nose, scale, revive ,stretcher, toothache ,Wheelchair ,Aids, ambulance,arm, bleed, cold ,crutches ,ease,elevate, fall, flu ,head, + Necessary for patients:..................... -Prepare the reading. + Part of the body :............................ + Illness or diseases :......................... P: 04/01/2014 Unit + Verbs:............................................ 9 :A first-aid course -Ask the Ss to give the correct answer. T: ………………. Period - Check the mistake if necessary. 57: Lesson 3: Read -Aks the Ss to read the words aloud in chorus. I. Objectives : 4.Consolidation . - After the lesson Ss will be able to - Aks the Ss to retell the main content know more about the way to do the of the listening and some main words first –aids inother cases; fainting , used in the hospital. shock, burns . - Ask Ss to retell the phrase to express - To drill reading skill. the requests , offers . and promises. II.Vocabulary. 5.Homework. - Ask the Ss to do the exercise2,3 ,4 - Explain some new words. ( page : 55-56 -57 ) in the work book.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span> Faint : ngÊt Lying flat: n»m th¼ng Elevate > < lower: n©ng > < h¹. Victim : n¹n nh©n. Revive : TØnh l¹i Ease the pain : gi¶m vÕt ®au Minimize tissue damage : gi¶m tèi ®a sù h háng c¸c m«. III.Language focus. - Modal verbs IV.Language skills. - Reading V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ………………………………… 2. Oral test -Do the exercise 4 (page: - 56 ) in the work book. 3. New lesson : A. Warm up. - Playthe matching . A B. 1. to send a. a cup of tea. 2. to fall b. off the bike . 3. to have c. the window open. 4. to come d. out of the hospital. 5. to drink e. a bad cut on the head. 6.to ease f. an ambulance to the hospital 7.to keep g. the pain with drugs. - Ask the Ss to read the answer . B. Pre- reading. - Ask the Ss to list the case they learnt in the last lesson. -Introduce the reading. Give the new words:. Faint : ngÊt Lying flat: n»m th¼ng Elevate > < lower: n©ng > < h¹. Victim : n¹n nh©n. Revive : TØnh l¹i Ease the pain : gi¶m vÕt ®au Minimize tissue damage : gi¶m tèi ®a sù h háng c¸c m«. C. While- reading Ask the Ss to scan the text and work in pairs to choose the case for the treatments mentioned in the book. - Ask some pairs to give the correct answer . - Read aloud the answers. - Check the mistake if necessary. + A ( fainting ). a. The victim should not sit or stand . C .The victim’s head should be below the level of your head. e. The victim should drink a cup of tea when reviving. B ( Shock ) b. Victim can not drink wine or beer . C. ( Burn) you should ease the pain with ice or cold water packs. -Give some other structures: + Force sb to do smt : bắt ai đó lµm g× + Let sb do smt : để ai đó làm gì - Ask the Ss to read the text aloud . - Correct the pronunciation if necessary. D. Post - reading - Ask the Ss to give and dicuss again the case and how to do the first aids. - Give the explaination to the Ss and help them to dicuss . + If someone is shock. We should................................................ ...............................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span> + if someone is fainting , we should................................................ ........................... + If someone is having burn , we should................................................ ................... + if someone is having a bad hurt on her arm, First we should....................................... 4.Consolidation . - Aks the Ss to retell the main content of the readingand some main words used in the case of the emegency.. 5.Homework. -Aks the Ss to do the exercise 7 ( page 58 ) in work book. -Prepare the writing..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span> P: 04/01/2014 Unit 9: A first-aid course T: ……………… Period 58: Lesson 4: Write I.Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to know how to write a thank you notes to your relatives -To drill writing skill. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. + Heading -Writer ‘s address - date. + Opening. + Body of the letter. + Closing. III.Language focus. - The simple future tense IV.Language skills. - Writing V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Class 8A3: .........…/34 Absent: ………………………………… 2. Oral test : -Do the exercise 6 (page 57 ) in the work book. 3. New lesson : A. Warm up. -Ask the Ss to give the outline of the letter. -Read the outline aloud. -Ask the Ss to write the outline. + Heading -Writer ‘s address - date. + Opening. + Body of the letter. + Closing. B. Pre- writing. Introduce the thankyou note to the relatives or friends.. -Ask the Ss to read the thank you note , and complete the letter using the form of the verbs. ( work in pairs ) - Check if necessary. - Ask the Ss to read the completed letter. Dear Hoa, Thank you very much for the flowers you sent me while I was in the hospital.They were very beautiful and they really helped to cheer me up. I came out of the hospital on Monday morning. Now I’m very bored . Will you come over to my place on the weekend? I’d love to see you. I’ll telephone you on Friday afternoon. Your friend, Nga C. While – writing. -Ask the Ss to work in invidual to write the thank you note to their friend , and invite him/ her to go on a pinic with them. - Read the letter. - Give the guiding letter. Dear Nguyen, I’d like to say thank you for the interesting book you gave me on my birthday last week. It is a wonderful bookabout Vietnamese traditions. It helps to make my day much more meaningful. This week I have more free time , and my family has decided to go on a pinic to my home villege on Saturday.Why don’t you join us ? We will be very happy to have you along. I’ll phone you tonight for details. I love to see you then Your friend..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span> Lan. D. Post- writing. - Ask the Ss to write another letter to a friend using other situation. - Ask the Ss to work in pairs to write. - Check if necessary. Or give the remark. 4. Consolidation. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Home work - Write aletter in the notebook. - Prepare the language focus..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span> P:13/01/2013 Unit 9 : A first-aid course T: Period 59: Lesson 5: Language focus I.Objectives : - To help Ss to learn the phrases: in order to/ so as to - To review the future simple. Modal verb Will to make requests, offers, and promises. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some words. - In order to/ So as to / To : Express the purpose. III.Language focus. - The simple future tense - Will make requests, offers, promises. IV.Language skills. - Writing V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test : - Read the letter prepare at home. 3. New lesson : A. Warm up. - Play the game : Completing sentences. - Devide Ss into two groups . Group 1 write incompleted sentence, group 2 go on writing , using to do or for doing to express the purpose. B. In order to/ So as to. 1. Presentation . Give example.. I always keep the window open in order to let the fresh air in. - Ask the Ss to give the form. In order to/ So as to / To : Express the purpose. 2. Pratice. - Ask Ss to work in group to do the exercise 1 p 86. - Ask two Ss to write on the BB the sentences. The rest do orally. -Give the correct answer. 1-f, 2-c, 3-b, 4-e ,5 –a , 6- d. 3. Production. -Ask the Ss to do more exercise( orally ): 1 . He went to Ha Noi. He wanted to meet his grandmother. 2.My sister studies E. She wanted to work for a foreign company. 3. She get up early. She wanted to go to class on time. C. Future simple. - Ask Ss to give the form and the use of the simple future. (+) S + will/ shall + V + O. (- ) S + will not / shall not + V + O (? ) Will/ Shall + S + V + O ? - Ask Ss to do the exercise 2 (p 86 ) . work in pairs - Ask Ss to go to the BB to do . The rest do orally. Exercise 2. Ba: What time will Aunt Mai be here ? Mrs Nga: She will be here in two hours. Ba: Will Uncle Sau be with her ? Mrs Nga : No, he won’t. He has to stay in Ho Chi Minh city. Ba: Shall I come to the Airport with you ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span> Mrs Nga: O K , It will be a nice trip for us both. Ba: I’ll be ready in two hours D. Will make requests, offers, promises. 1. Presentation. Give the examples. Will you open the window for me ? Shall I close the window ? I promise , I will do it better next time. 2. Practice. Ask Ss to work in pairs to use the pictures to complete the dialogues on (page 87). . Mrs Tuyet: Will you give it to me , please ? c . Mrs Tuyet ; Will you answer the phone ? d. Nga: Will you turn on the TV, please Nga? e. Mrs Tuyet : Will you pour a grass of water for me ? 3. Production. - Ask Ss to read the sentences infront the rest. Will you pain the door , please ?/ I will pain the door this afternoon. Will you study harder, please ?/ I will study harder. d. Will you carry the bag for me ?/ Shall I carry the bag for you ? e. Will you hang the washing please?/ Will you cut the grass , please ?/ I will cut the grass for you ? 4. Consolidation - Ask Ss to retell the main content of the lesson: future simple 5. Home work - Prepare new lesson: Unit 10. Getting started & Listen and read P:13/01/2013 10 : Recycling. Unit. T: Period 60: Lesson 1: Getting started & Listen and read I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic : the recycling. - To review the words : redue, reuse, protect environment, packaging, friend of the earth. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Cloth bag: tói v¶i. Plastic bag: tói nhùa Banana/ lotus leaves: l¸ chuèi, l¸ sen Overpackaged: đóng gói quá nhiÒu Throw away products; s¶n phÈm vøt ®i sau khi dïng. Packaged; đóng gói III.Language focus. - The modal verbs. IV.Language skills. - Listening and reading V. Preparation: - Textbook, tape and cassette and picture. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2 .Oral test.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span> Answer the questions: a. What do you often do to protect the environment ? b. Do you often participate in protecting . 3. New lesson . A. Getting started. Introduce the lesson , make the list of ways that help to reduce amout of garbage we produce. ( work in pairs ) - Ask Ss to give their opions. Example: We should use cloth bag instead of plastic bag. We shouldn’t buy things overpackaged - Give some new words: Cloth bag: tói v¶i. Plastic bag: tói nhùa Banana/ lotus leaves: l¸ chuèi, l¸ sen Overpackaged: đóng gói quá nhiÒu Throw away products: s¶n phÈm vøt ®i sau khi dïng. Packaged: đóng gói - Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus. B. Pre- listening and reading. - Introduce the topic of the lesson and ask Ss to give the representation of the logo in the text book ( p, 89 ) - Give some new words: Reprentative : ngời đại diện Protect the environment : b¶o vÖ m«i trêng. Save natural resources: tiÕt kiÖm nguån nhiªn liÖu. C. While- listening and reading - Play the tape . - Ask Ss to read the reading and in silent - Ask Ss to role play the reading. - Check the pronunciation if necessary. -Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find out the questions.( Work in pairs) Answer: a. Reduce means not buying products which are overpackaged. b. we can reuse things like envelopes, glass, plastic bottles and old plastic bags. c. Recycle means not just throwing things away.Try to find another use for them. d. We can look for information on recycling things by having a contact with an orgarnization like Friends of the Earth, going to the local library, or asking your family and friends or scientific society. e. Mrs Blake tells Lan that we should not use plastic bags because they are difficult to be destroyed, so amount of garbage increases. - Check if necessary D. Post- listening and reading. - Ask Ss to list the things that we do to increase the garbage. + Not throwing things away. + Reuse things. + Not buying things that are overpackaged. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to write. - Read the sentences aloud. 4. Consolidation. Retell the main content of the lesson and give the way to redue the garbage. 5. Home work..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span> - Ask Ss to do the exercise 1 + 2 ( page 59 ) in the work book. - Prepare new lesson: Speak & listen ----------------------***-------------------------P:13/01/2013 Unit 10 : Recycling T: Period 61: Lesson 2: Speak & listen I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to distinguish the group of the material like : paper, glass, metal and learn how to make a compost heap . -To drill Ss Speaking and listening skill. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Metal Vegetable matter Farbric III.Language focus. - The simple future tense IV.Language skills. - Speaking and Listening V. Preparation: - Textbook, tape and cassette and picture. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test Answer Ss to do the exercise 1+2 in the work book, ( p:59 ) 3. New lesson . A. Warm up.. - Ask Ss to play the Jumple words with the new words in the last period: + SUERE :......... + REUSE +LERECCY :.......+ RECYCLE + LASPIC : ..........+ PLASTIC + PRAW :............ + WRAP. + FRETLIIEZR :.. + FERLIZER. - Work in pairs to rewrite the words. -Ask some pairs to write on the board. - Read the words again. B.Pre- speaking. -Ask Ss to work in pairs to look at the pictures and name the things in the picture in English. - Give the new words: Can,old newspaper, clothes, shoes, vegetables, school bag. Bottles. C-While- speaking. Ask Ss to work in pairs to discuss the things in the picture . - Ask Ss to work in pairs to distingiush and devide into groups. Paper : Glass: Plastic: Metal: Vegetable matter: Farbric: - Give the structures to use to discuss. + Which group do clothes belong to ? - Put them in “ fabric ‘ + What can we do with those clothes ? - We can recycle them and make them into paper. +Are fruit or leaves “ vegetable matter “ ? - That ‘s it. + What can we do with it ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span> - We can make it into compost or fertilizers for our fields. - Ask some pairs to speak in front of the rest. - Check if necessary. D. Post- speaking. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to find more items. - Ask some pairs to read aloud the words they found. E. Further practice. Ask ss to use the words in column A with the words in column B. A. B. 1.Milk a. light 2. arrival. b. man 3. car c. night 4. over d. tires 5. sun e.time. - Ask Ss to read the words. A. Pre – listening. - Ask Ss to answer the questions: a. Have you ever seen a compost heap? b. Do you know how to make a compost? Ask Ss to work in pairs to discuss about to make a compost heap. - Introduce some new words: Compost heap: hÇm ñ ph©n xanh Tea leaves: l¸ chÌ Egg shells: vá trøng Moisture: độ ẩm Condensation: sù ngng tô - Introduce the listening and ask Ss to listen to the tape to choose the correct answer. B. While- listening -Play the tape three times and ask Ss to tick the correct answer. -Ask Ss to work in pairs to tick the right answer and then share the answer with the partner. - Write the answer and read the answer.. a) A, b) B, c) A, d) B. - Check the answer. C. Post- listening Ask Ss to arrange the step to make a compost. Put these phares in the prder of the compost- making process. 1. Use shovels to turn the compost. 2. Start a compost heap. 3.Water the compost. 4.Place in the garden. 5. Use as fertilizer. 6. Keep for six months. -Ask Ss to read aloud in front of the rest. D. Further practice . Ask Ss to give the past participle for these verbs. - make bring. buy drink do - begin send - tell give build. - know grow throw take. Wear - find go - put see write. - Ask Ss to read aloud the verbs in chorus. 4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the lesson. - Retell again the way to make the compost heap. 5. Home work -Read again these participle - Prepare the reading in the rext book.( p 92) - Do exercise in the work book 3- 4( page 60 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span> ------------------------***------------------------D u y Ö t : 1 4 / 0 1 / 2 0 1 3 T N g u y Ô n S ü Q u a n g. P:20/01/2013 Unit 10 : Recycling T: Period 62 :Lesson 3: Read. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to learn how to recycle things such as : glass, car tires , bottles. -To drill Ss reading skill II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Pipe: èng níc Refill : đổ đầy lại Deposit: tiền đặt cọc. III.Language focus. + The passive voice IV.Language skills. - Reading V. Preparation: - Textbook and picture. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test - Answer Ss to do the exercise 4 in the work book, ( p:60.) 3.New lesson A. Warm up. Ways of - Ask Ss to play the net work:. recycling.. B. Pre- reading. Ask Ss to dicuss how to recycle things like bottles, glass. - What can we do with car tires/ bottles? - How can we make it into.........? Introduce some new words: Pipe: èng níc Refill : đổ đầy lại Deposit: tiền đặt cọc. -Read aloud the new words in chorus..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span> -Ask Ss to work in pairs to read the article in the environmental page of a newspaper : The Green Gazette. C. While- reading Read the reading and answer the questions in the text book. - Write down the answer and read the answers. Ask Ss to read aloud the answer. a) People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles. b) The glass is broken up, melted and made into new glassware. c) The Oregon government made a new law that there must be a deposit on drink cans. The deposit is returned when people bring the cans back for rycling. d) Compost is made from house hold and garden waste. e) If we have a recycling story to share, we can call or fax the magazine at 5 265 456. Check if necessary. -Introduce the new structures that are in those sentences: + The passive voice: Form: S + Be + past particle. Eg: I do this exercise. This exercise is done by me. - Ask Ss to give more examples. He bought some English books yesterday. Some English books were bought yesterday. - Ask Ss to read again the reading and the new structure and do the second exercise. ( work in pairs to do the exercise) - Read and write down the whole sentences: + Car tires are recycled to make pipes and floor coverings. + Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled ( with milk). + Glass is broken up, melted and made into new glassware. + Drink cans are brought back for recycling. + House hold and garden waste is made into compost. - Check if necessary. -Ask Ss to read aloud the reading. D. Post- reading Ask Ss to read again the sentences that contain the new structures in the reading. 4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the reading. 5. Home work - Do exercise 5 +6 in the work book ( p:61-62) - Prepare the writing -----------------------***--------------------------. P:20/01/2013 10 : Recycling T: 63:Lesson 4: Write. Unit Period. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to be provided how to recycle things like paper, tea -To drill Ss writing skill II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Soak: lµm thÊm , ng©m, ít. Dry:ph¬i kh«. Press: ấn ,đè Bucket:thïng, x«.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span> Over night: qua đêm. Wooden spoon: th×a gç Mash: bãp nghiÒn n¸t Wire mesh: líi s¾t Mixture: hçn hîp Firmly: m¹nh, chÆt III.Language focus. + The passive voice IV.Language skills. - Writing V. Preparation: - Textbook and picture. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test Answer Ss to do the exercise 5 +6 in the work book, ( p:60.-61) 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. - Ask Ss to list the things that we can use to recycle. - Read aloud the words given They are : paper , glass, bottle , used paper, car tires, school bags, plastic bags, B. Pre- writing. Introduce the lesson and ask Ss to read the reading , work in pairs , and fill the verbs given in the blanks. 1) use. 2. Mix 3. Place 4. Press 5. Wrap 6. Wait 7. Dry - Call some pairs to read aloud the reading -Ask Ss to read the whole reading. Introduce the new words: Soak; lµm thÊm , ng©m, ít. Dry: ph¬i kh«.. Press:. ấn ,đè Bucket: thïng, x« Over night: qua đêm. Wooden spoon; th×a gç Mash: bãp nghiÒn n¸t Wire mesh: líi s¾t Mixture: hçn hîp Firmly: m¹nh, chÆt C. While- writing Introduce the writing and ask Ss to work in individual to write following the directions. Introduce the new words: Scatter: r¶i, r¾c Tray : khay , m©m - Ask Ss to read aloud the writing a)First, take the used tea leaves from the teapot. b)Next, scatter the tea leaves on a tray. c)Then, dry the leaves in the sun. d)Finally , put the dry leaves in a pot for future use. - Check and give the remark if necessary. D.Post- writing - Ask Ss to do the exercise: Arrange the steps to recycle the car tyres into the sandals: 1. Remove all dirty substances. 2. Put them into the production line. 3. Collect the old tyres and put them in reserve. 4. And add some necessary matters. 5. Melt the tyres carefully. 6. Get the sandals availble and introduce them into the market. Ask some pairs to read aloud the sentences. - Check and give the correct answers..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span> 4. Consolidation - Retell again the content of the lesson. 5. Home work - Do the exercise 7 ( p: 63 ) Prepare : Language focus.. P:20/01/2013 Unit 10 : Recycling T: Period 64: Lesson 5 : Language focus I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to learn more about the passive voice. And they will know how to use adjectives followed by an infinitive, and a noun clause. -To drill Ss writing , and reading skills. II.Vocabulary. - Review some words of unit 10 III.Language focus. + The passive voice IV.Language skills. - Writing V. Preparation: - Textbook . VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization:. Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test - Ask Ss to read again the way to recycle tea. ( p :94) . 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. - Ask Ss to give the participle form of these verbs: Break. .............. Start ............... Wash .............. Show ............. Dry ............... Build ............... Mix .............. Finish ............... Melt ............... make ................ Use ............... begin .................. -Ask Ss to work in pairs to do and then write the verbs on the BB. B. Presentation. Introduce the passive form and ask Ss to write in the notebook. Form. S + be + Past participle. * The present simple with the passive form: S + is/ are/ am + PP. Eg : People speak English all over the world. English is spoken all over the world. * The simple past with the passive form: S + was/ were + PP. Eg : Truyen Kieu was written by Nguyen Du..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span> * The simple future with passive form: S + will + be + PP Eg: The work will be finished tomorrow. Note: Active: S+ V + O. Pasive: S + Be + PP + by + O. C. Practice . Ask Ss to use these form to do the exercise 1 in the text book( on page 95) -Work in pairs. The glass is washed with a detergent liquid. c. The glass pieces are dried completely. d. They are mixed with certain specific chemicals. e. ................. Ask Ss to do exercise 2 in the text book on page 96. -Work in pairs to read and complete the dialogue. -Write the answers on BB. 1) will be shown. 2).will it be built ? 3) will be finished. 4) will it be made? -Check if necessary. D. Production. Change these sentences in to passive voice. 1. My parents take me to the zoo once a month. 2. They will change the date of the meeting again. 3. I saw a strange man in the garden last night. E. Presentation. -Introduce theAdj+ to –infinitive. It’s + Adj + ( for sb ) + to infinitive.. F.Practice. -Ask Ss to do Ex 3 ( P, 96) - Work in pairs to read the answers . 1. easy to understand. 2. hard to believe. 3. Dangerous to go. 4. Important to work. G. Production. Introduce that adj can be followed by a clause. -Ask Ss to work in pairs to do Ex 4 ( p :97) 1.was happy. 2.am relieved .3. is afraid 4) Are sure ? 5) am certain. 4. Consolidation Retell the main content of the lesson. 5. Home work - Do the exercises again in the work book. - Prepare -Unit 11: Getting started & listen and read . P:20/01/2013 T: Unit 11: Traveling around Viet Nam Period 65: Lesson 1: Getting started & listen and read I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to learn more about the interesting places in Viet nam , such as : The temple of Literature, Ha long bay, Nha trang Habor. -To drill Ss listening , and reading skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Front seat: ghÕ tríc Water buffalo: con tr©u Crop :. mïa vô.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span> Corn : ng« Sugar cane : c©y mÝa Take a photo : chôp ¶nh III.Language focus. - Would you mind + V-ing ..........? Would you mind if I + Ved ........? See ( sb) do / doing (smt). IV.Language skills. - Listening and reading V. Preparation: - Textbook . VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : - Check the exercise in the notebook of the Ss ? 3.New lesson : A. Warm up HCM city. Ha noi. - Ask Ss to list the famous places in Viet nam. Work in groups. B. Getting started. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to match the pictures with the name of them. - Write the answers and read the names. a) Ngo mon Gate b) Nha Rong Habor c) The Temple of Literature.. d) Ha long Bay C. Pre- reading and listening. - Introduce the lesson and ask Ss to listen to the tape . -Introduce some new words. Front seat: ghÕ tríc Water buffalo: con tr©u Crop :. mïa vô Sugar Take a. Corn : ng« cane : c©y mÝa photo : chôp ¶nh Would you mind + V-ing ..........? Would you mind if I + Ved ........? See ( sb) do / doing (smt). - Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and then read the dialogue. D. While- listening and reading. -Ask Ss to read the dialogue and role play the dialogue. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions. - Write the answer and read the answer aloud. Hue a.Where does Hoa meet Tim ? Famous places b. Who does Tim come to Vietnam with ? Quangninh c. How do they travel to Hanoi ? d. What does Tim like to do on the way to Hanoi ? - Check the answer if necesarry. - Ask Ss to read again the doalogue and do the exercise in the text book,( p: 99 ) - Work in pairs to do the exercise. - Read aloud the answer inturns. a. T b. T c. F (Not in a bus in a taxi). d. T.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span> e. T f. F ( not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are grown aroud Hanoi. ) - Check if necessary. E. Post – reading and listening. Ask Ss to arrange the sentences into correct order.  They stop to take some photographs.  They get into the car to Hanoi.  Hoa meets Tim at the airpot.  Tim sees aboy on a warter buffalo.. Q u a n g. 4. Consolidation -Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Home work -Do exercise 1 in the work book ( page 65 ) - Prepare: Speak & listen.. -----------------------***-------------------------DuyÖt : 21/01/2 013 P:27/01/2013 Unit 11: T Traveling around Viet nam T: Period 66: Lesson 2 : Speak & Listen N g I. Objectives : u -After the lesson Ss will be able to y use the suggestion : Would / Do you Ô mind.........in many communicatio n situations and the way to respond to S the suggestions. ü.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span> -To drill Ss speaking and listening skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. + Do you mind closing the door? + Would you mind opening the window ? + Do you mind if I take a photo ? + Would you mind if I took a photo ? III.Language focus. - The suggestions. IV.Language skills. - Speaking and Listening V. Preparation: - Textbook, pictures of famous places .. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test - Check the exercise 1 ( p: 66 ) in the workbook . 3.New lesson A. Warm up. - Ask Ss to rewrite these phrases into the suggestions. - close the door. - Give the glass of cold water. - Take photographs - Open the door. - Buy a pen. + Would you mind + V-ing........?. - Would you mind closing the door ? - Would you mind giving me the glass of cold water ? B. Presentation: * Pre- speaking. -Introduce the suggestion the way to reply them. Request. + Do you mind closing the door? + Would you mind opening the window ? + Do you mind if I take a photo ? + Would you mind if I took a photo ? Reply: -No, I don’t. -No, of course not. - Not at all. -Please do. -Please go ahead. + I’m sorry I can’t . I’m sorry, that is not possible. I ’d prefer you didn’t. I’d rather you didn’t. * While- speaking. Ask Ss to work in pairs to play as student A , and one as student B, use the information and make the request and suggestions. - Introduce the speaking and ask Ss to role play the dialogue. + Give the guiding answer A. Excuse me. Can you help me ? B. Yes, sir. What can I do for you ? A. Yes ,Could you please give me some information, plaese . B. Yes, ofcourse. What information do you want ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span> A. I want to visit a museum. Would you mind suggesting one ? B. I suggest you go to the History Museum. A. That sounds interesting. Do you mind telling me what time it hapens? B. It opens from 8 am to 4 pm everyday except Monday. A. Thank you. B. You are welcome. Have a nice day. - Call some pairs to speak out , others listen. * Post- speaking. - Suppose that you meet a tourist who visit your town for the first time. The tourist want to know some places in your town. You work in pairs to make a similar dialogue , using the places of interest in your town. B. Pre- listening. - Ask Ss to answer the questions How many roads/ streets/ offices are there ? - Introduce the new words:(base on the picture in the text book ) highway: đờng cao tốc. Tourist information center : trung t©m th«ng tin du lÞch. Bus station : tr¹m xe buýt. Hotel: kh¸ch s¹n Pagoda ; đền Temple: chïa. Restaurant: nhµ hµng - Ask Ss to read the new words aloud. C.While –listening. - Introduce the listening and ask Ss to listen to the tape about the places metioned above on the map. - Play the tape and ask Ss to match the places to their correct possition.. - Ask Ss to write the answer on the BB and read the answers aloud then check. a) restaurant b) hotel. c) Bus station. d) Pagoda. e) Temple. - Play the tape again to let Ss check their answers. D. Post- listening. - Ask Ss to give the direction of some places in Ha hoa town. Ha hoa hospital. Ha hoa post office. Am thuong station. Ha hoa stadium. - Work in pairs to practice. - Call some pairs to practice aloud in front of the rest. Others listen to them. A. Could you tell me the way to Ha hoa hospital ? B. Yes , of course. You must go straight this road. Then you take the first street on the left. Go along about 100 meters then you turn right. Take the second street on your left. The hospital is in front of you. A. May be it’s difficult for me to go. B .If you follow my direction you will find the hospital. A. Thank you very much. B Not at all. - Give the remark if necessary. E.Further practice. - Match each world Heritage Site in Vietnam recognized by UNESCO in A with it’s province in B. 1. Ha long bay. 2. Phong Nha – Ke Bang Natural park. 3. Coplex of Hue monuments..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span> 4. My son Sanctuary. 5. Hoi an Ancient town 4. Consolidation - Review the suggestion with “ Would you mind ..................?“ - Note the way to ask for the direction. 5.Home work - Write 5 sentences using the suggestion. - And do exercise 3 (page : 66 ), the exercise 5+6 ( p: 67) in the work book. - Prepare: Read. P:27/01/2013 Unit 11: Traveling around Viet Nam T: Period 67: Lesson 3 : Read I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to be provided the main information about the sights, accomodation of some famous places in Vietnam such as: Nha Trang, Da Lat, SaPa, Ha Long Bay. - To drill Ss reading skill. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Seaside resort: khu nghØ m¸t b·i biÓn. Oceanic Institute: ViÖn h¶i d¬ng häc Griant Buddha: Tîng phËt khæng lå. Offshore island: đảo xa bờ External spring: Mïa xu©n vÜnh cöu Water fall: th¸c níc Mountainous resort:khu nghØ m¸t vïng nóiTribal village: B¶n lµng cña ngêi d©n téc. Mountain slopes:Nh÷ng sên nói Limestone island: đảo đá vôi. III.Language focus.. - The suggestions. IV.Language skills. - Reading. V. Preparation: - Textbook, pictures of famous places .. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test: - Check the exercise 5+6 ( p: 67 ) in the workbook . 3.New lesson: A. Warm up. - Ask Ss to play the guessing game. - Devide the class into two groups . which group give the correct answer will the win group. a) It’s a southern city established a bit more than three hundred years ago. ( in the exercise book ) B. Pre- reading. - Introduce the topic of the reading and give the meaning of the new words: Seaside resort: khu nghØ m¸t b·i biÓn. Oceanic Institute: ViÖn h¶i d¬ng häc Griant Buddha: Tîng phËt khæng lå. Offshore island: đảo xa bờ External spring: Mïa xu©n vÜnh cöu Water fall: th¸c níc Mountainous resort:khu nghØ m¸t vïng nóiTribal village: B¶n lµng cña ngêi d©n téc. Mountain slopes:Nh÷ng sên nói Limestone island: đảo đá vôi..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span> UNESCO( united Nations Educaditional Scientific and Cultural organization ): Tæ chøc Gi¸o dôc, khoa häc vµ v¨n ho¸ cña liªn hîp quèc. World heritage:Di s¶n v¨n ho¸ thÕ giíi. Magnificient: Léng l·y C. While- reading. - Ask Ss to scan the reading . - Ask Ss to read the advertisements again and check the topics mentioned in the brochres about the resorts. - Ask Ss to compare the answers with the partner. - Read the answers aloud and write down the answers. - Ask Ss to do the exercise 2 ( work in pairs) - Read the questions aloud by asking and answer the questions. D. Post -reading. - Ss read again and tell the main content of the advertisements. 4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the reading. 5. Home work - Do exercise 6+7+8 in the work book ( p68-69 ) - Prepare: Write. -----------------------***--------------------------. N g u y Ô n S ü Q u a n g. P:17/2/2013 Unit 11: Traveling around Viet Nam T: Period 68: Lesson 4 :Write. I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to describe the chronogical trip or trip space order. - To drill Ss writing skill. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Adventure: chuyÕn phiªu lu. Duyệt : Paddle : đạp nớc, tay chèo. 28/01/2 Canoe: ca n« 013 III.Language focus. - The suggestion T IV.Language skills. - Reading V. Preparation:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span> - Textbook, pictures of famous places .. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test Check the exercise 6+7+8 ( p: 68-69) in the workbook . 3.New lesson A. Warm up. - Ask Ss to play the matching with the world heritage sites. 1. Ha long bay. 2. Phong nha – ke bang Natural park. 3 .Coplex of Hue monuments. 4 .My son Sanctuary. 5 .Hoi an Ancient town. B. Pre- writing. - Introduce the way to write a paragraph. “Paragraph is usually organize in time order.That means the exact name ,and place are introduce right in the topic. “ -Ask Ss to work in pairs to read the reading and answer the questions below:  Where did the Browns go last week?  What was the weather like ? - Introduce the new words: Adventure: chuyÕn phiªu lu. Paddle : đạp nớc, tay chèo. Canoe: ca n« - Ask Ss to read the new words and introduce the phrase : last week, one afternoon, after.. C. While –writing. Ask Ss to read the next part of the story and rewrite the story in the correct time Ask Ss to rewrite the story on the clear paper and check . -Ask Ss to read aloud the story. a) The wind started to blow huge waves, and the rain became heavier. b) The canoe moved up and down the water. c) Shannon dropped her paddle. d) She leaned over and tried to pick it up. e) The canoe overturned and evryone fell into the deep and dangerous water. f) A boat appeared and recused them. g) The family was very lucky. - Check if necessary. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and write about Uyen’s memorable day. - Put the events in the correct order and complete the story by using the pictures. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to write on the clear papers. - Read aloud the story. a) She had a math examon Friday and she got up late. b) She realized her alarm clock did not go off. e) As she was leavinghome , it started to rain heavily. h) Uyen tried to run as fast as she could. a) Suddenly she stumble against a rock( and she fell onto the road ). f) Her school bag went into a pool , and everything got wet. c) Strangely, The rained stopped as she got her classroom. g)Luckily, Uyen had enough time to finished her exam. - Check if necessary..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span> D. Post- writing. - Ask Ss to read again the story and retell the story aloud in front of the class. 4. Consolidation : Note the way to write the paragraph. 5.Home work : Ask Ss to do the exercise 9 ( page 69) in the work book. - Prepare: Language focus. -----------------------***-------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span> Unit 11: Traveling around Viet Nam Period 69: Lesson 5 : Language focus P: 16-02-2014 T: 21-02-2014 I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to know how ti use the present participle( V-ing) and past participle ( V-ed). And the request (Would you mind.........? ) -To drill Ss writing and reading skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some words. III.Language focus. - Introduce the pressent participle + Present participle( active participle ) V-ing. + Past participle ( Passive participle ) V-ed . IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8:.........…/…….Absent: …………………………………. 2.Oral test : - Check the exercise 9 ( p:69) in the workbook . 3.New lesson : A. Warm up . -Ask Ss to make sentences with the request:  Would you mind + V ing.....?  Would you mind if......................? -Write the examples on the BB. And read the sentences aloud. B. Presentation.. - Using “mind” in requests + Do you mind V-ing? + Would you mind V-ing? + Do you mind if + S + V? + Would you mind if + S + Ved1? Request + Do you mind V-ing? + Would you mind V-ing? + Do you mind if + S + V? + Would you mind if + S + V-ed1?. agre - No, I don - No, of co - Not at all - Please do - Please go. - Introduce the pressent participle + Present participle(active participle ) V-ing. ( Bao hµm nghÜa tác động ) + Past participle (Passive participle) V-ed . (Bao hàm nghĩa bị động.) + Ph©n tõ hiÖn t¹i vµ ph©n tõ qu¸ khø dùng để rút gọn mệnh đề tính ngữ. Eg: The boy is my brother. He is sitting in the room. + The boy sitting in the room is my brother. These bicycles are very good. They are made in Japan. + These bicycles made in Japan are very good. C. Practice. -Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise 1+2 ( page 108-109 )in the text book. -Read aloud the sentences: + Exercise 1: -The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang. -The women carrying a bag is Miss Lien. -The boy standing next to Miss Lien is Nam. - The boy sitting under the stree is Ba. - The girl standing by the table is Lan..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span> -The girls playing chess are Nga on the right and Hoa on the left. +Exercise 2. a) The old lamp made in China is five dollars. b) The doll dressed in red is two dollars. c) The toys animals are kept in a cardboard are 10 dollars. d) The flowers wrapped in blue paper is one dollars. e) The truck made from recycled aluminum cans is two dollars. + Exercise 3: -Work in pairs to do the exercise. a) Would you mind moving your car ? No, of course not. b) Would you mind putting out your cigarette? No, of course not. c) Would you mind getting me some coffee ? I’m sorry , I’m too busy right now. d) Would you mind waiting a moment ? I’m sorry, I can’t. -Ask Ss to work in pairs to do exercise by using the request: Would you mind+ Ving ...........................? E. Production. Ask Ss to work in pairs to make requestby using : Would you mind If........................? - Read aloud the requests. + Exercise 4. c) Request :Do you mind if I sit down ? Respond: please do . d)Request: Would you mind if I used your phone ? Respond : Please do .. e) Request:Do you mind turning down the stereo ? Respond: I’d rather you didn’t. e) Do you mind if I turn on the airconditioner? Please do. 4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson. 5 . Home work: - Prepare for the written test..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span> P:17/2/2013 Period 70: Revision T: I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the structures and the tenses they have learnt to do exercises. II.Vocabulary. - Review vocabulary of unit 9 and 10. III.Language focus. - The simple present or the present continuous tense, Prepositions of time and The comparison. Would you mind + V ing.....? Would you mind if......................? IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Presentation: * Exercises. I. GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY These are incomplete sentences. Circle the letter A, B, C or D as your best choice to complete each sentence. 1. The Pyramid of Cheops is one of the seven ……………….. of the world.. A. sightseeing B. temples C. landmarks D. wonders 2. I don’t know how ………….…… the game. A. plays B. played C. to play D. playing 3. A contest in which participants have to fetch water from the river is called…………... A. water fetch contest B. water- fetching contest C. fetching water contest D. fetch water contest 4. The doorbell rang while Tam…………… television A. was watching B. is watching C. watches D. watched 5. Do you mind if I …………. this composition for me A. corrected B. am correcting C. correct D. correcting 6. We should use cloth bags…………. ……plastic bags to reduce garbage A. full of B. instead of C. afraid of D. replace of 7. Tam said to his teacher “Will we have a test tomorrow?”. A. Tam asked his teacher if they would have a test the following day B. Tam asked his teacher if they would have a test tomorrow C Tam asked his teacher if we would have a test the following day D. Tam asked his teacher if they will have a test the following day.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span> 8. The watch…………..of gold was given to me by my uncle on my 14th birthday A. that made B. making C. makes D. made 9. .Alexander Graham Bell invented the telephone in 1876 A. The telephone is invented by Alexander graham Bell in 1876 B. The telephone was invented in 1876 by Alexander Graham Bell C. The telephone was invented By Alexander Graham Bell in 1876 D. The telephone are invented By Alexander Graham Bell in 1876 10. Donna works in a shop that sells flowers and plants. She ‘s ________. A. baker B. farmer C. gardener D. florist 11. _________ is a mountain with a hole in the top where fire , gas and lava sometimes come out. A. volcano B. valley C. hill D. mount 12. Nga showed the tourist where ________ a map of the city. A. get B. to get C. getting D. got II. READING (2.5 marks) A. There are 6 blanks in the following passage. Choose the best word or phrase for each numbered blank by marking A, B, C or D. (1.5 ms) Tet is a national and (1) _____ festival in Vietnam. It is occasion for every Vietnamese to be returned to think (2)______ their past activities and hope for good luck when the year to come. Before Tet all houses are white washed and (3) _______with yellow. apricot flowers and colorful lanterns. Everybody is looking (4) _______ to a more favorite life. (5) _______the New Year’s Eve, children are smartly dressed. They are hoping to (6)_____ money put in a small red envelopes as they are wishing longevity to their grandparents and parents. Wrong doings should be absolutely avoided on these days. 1. A. traditional B. modern C. music D. summer 2. A. after B. to C. about D. for 3. A. decorate B. decorated C. decorating D. decorates 4. A. forward B. for C. after D. at 5. A. In B. At C. On D. When 6. A. make B. but C. sell D. receive B. Read the following passage and choose the item (A, B, C or D) that best answers each of the questions about it(1.0m) The Seven Wonders of the world is a widely known list of seven popular sites of classical antiquity. The earliest known version of the list was compiled in the 2nd century BC by Antipater of Sidon. It only includes works located around the Mediterranean rim where sightseers could typically travel safety. Of these wonders, the only one that was survived to the present day.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span> is the Great Pyramid of Giza. The existence of the Hanging Gardens has not been definitively proven. Records show that the other five wonders were destroyed by natural disasters. 1. Which of the following could replace the word “ popular” in line 2? A. famous B. wonderful C. amazing D. interesting 2. . What is the passage written about? A. The Great Pyramid of Giza C. The Seven Wonders of the World B. Antipater of Sidon D. The existence of the Hanging Gardens 3. . The earliest version of the list of the seven wonders of the world _________. A. was compiled in the 2nd century B. was compiled by Antipater of Sidon C. only includes works located around the Mediterranean rim D. all are correct 4. Today we can see _________. A. all of the Seven Wonders of the World C. the Hanging Gardens B. only the Great Pyramid of Giza D. five of the seven wonders of the world III. WRITING (2.5 marks) 1. Rewrite the following sentences 1. Can I turn on the TV? Would you mind……………………………… ………………………..? 2. They use recycled plastic to make toys and utensils.. Recycled …………………………………… ……………………… 3. The last time I played tennis was in 1990. I haven’t …………………………………… …………………………… 4. Is Phong Nha the most beautiful cave in Viet Nam? The tourist asked …………………………………… …………………… 2. Use these sets of suggested words to write a story. Beginning: -. Last year class 8B had a terrible experience. Once weekend, they decided to go for a picnic to Cuc Phuong National park a. Soon after/ arrive/ the park/ start to rain ..................................................................... b.They/ have to wait/ two hours/ bus/ before rain/ stop. ...................................................................... c. They/ get out of/ bus/ lunch. ..................................................................... d. After lunch/ they/ begin to explore/ park/ groups of four students. ..................................................................... e. Unluckily/ it begin/ rain heavily again. ..................................................................... f. Everybody/ get wet/ decide/ leave park/ without/ watching anything. ……………………………… ……………………………… ……………………* Answer key I. Vocabulary and grammar. 1.D. 2.C. 3. B. II. Reading. 4.A. 5. C. 6. B. 7. A.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span> 1. 1. A 2. 1. A. 2. C. 3. B 2. C. III. Writing 1. Rewrite the following sentences 1. Would you mind turning on the TV? 2. Recycled plastic is used to make toys and utensils 3. I haven’t played tennis since 1990 4. The tourist asked if / whether Phong Nha was the most beautiful cave in Viet Nam 2. Use these sets of suggested words to write a story. - Soon after they arrived the park. It started to rain - They had to wait for two hours in the bus before the rain stopped - They got out of the bus for lunch - After lunch they began to explore the park in groups of four students - Unluckily it began to rain again - Everybody got wet and they decided to leave the park without watching anything 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points. 5. Homework: - Review and re-do exercises.. P:17/2/2013 Period 71: Revision T: I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the structures and the tenses they have learnt to do exercises. II.Vocabulary. - Review vocabulary of unit 11. III.Language focus. - The simple present or the present continuous tense, Prepositions of time and The comparison. IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Presentation: * Exercises. I. Choose the best answer: 1. I’m learning very hard these days ……………………… get good marks at my exam. A. that B. in order C. in order to D. in order that 2. Perhaps she went to another store …………………………… get better milk of lower price. A. in order as B. so as to C. in order that D. so as.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span> 3. Mrs Quyen decided to go by bike ……………………………… to keep fit. A. so as B. so as to C. in order to D. in order that 4. That beautiful toy ………………………… from recycled paper. A. make B. made C. is made D. making 5. Dried sugar canes …………………………… to produce paper. A. are reused B. reused C. are reusing D. is reused 6. Cloth bags ………………………… used instead of plastic bags. A. are B. is C. are used D. are using 7. The old car tires ………………………… to make pipes and floor coverings. A. will be recycled B. will recycled C. will recycle D. will be 8. The glass bottles ………………………… broken into small pieces. A. will be break B. will be C. be D. will break 9. I am happy ………………………… all the exams. A. to passing B. to pass C. passing D. is passing. 10. We are ready ………………………… clean the environment. A. that B. so C. to D.  II. Supply the correct verb form: 1. This is the first time Hoa (meet) …………………………… Tim’s family. 2. What ………… you (do) …………… this time yesterday? I(work)……………………… on the computer. 3. Yesterday the light (go) …………………… out while we(have)………………………… dinner. 4. Do you mind if I (ask) …………………… you a private question? 5. The trees are (plant) …………………………… by his father. 6. The new bridge will (build) …………………………… by the end of the year. 7. The garbage can (use) …………………………… to make fertilizer. 8. They ask me (repair) …………………………… the table. III. Rewrite the following sentences 1. My father takes me to school >I am…………………………………. …………………………………… ………… 2. The man is my father. He is playing chess with Ba > The man …………………………………… …………………………………… …….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span> T: Time allowance: 45 ms I. The aims. - To test students’ knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11. - Knowledge: - Would you mind if I, Would you mind, be used to and passive voice. - Vocabulary: learnt vocabulary from unit to 9 unit 11. - Skills: listening, reading and writing. A. The matric . Recognizing Knowledge TNKQ. Vocabulary and grammar. passive voice.Tenses. TL. Understan TNK Q. T. 8. 4 Read and. 3. She went to Ha Noi . she wanted to visit many interesting places > She went to Ha noi in order to…………………………………… …………………… 4. The last time I met him was five years ago. I haven’t …………………………………… ………………………………… 5. “Is Mount Everest 8,848 meters high?” . Lien asked me………………………………… …………………………………… … 6. It is my first visit to Vung Tau - I have never……………………………… …………………………………… ……… 7. " Don't throw things away" , Miss Linda said to the students - Miss Linda asked……………………………… …………………………………… … 8. I will repair your bicycle tomorrow afternoon - Your bicycle……………………………… ………. ………………………………… 4. Consolidation: DuyÖt : 18/02/2013 - Remind Ss the key points. TT 5. Homework: - Review and re-do exercises.. Reading. 8 Writing. n Sü Quang P: 24/02/2013 72:Written test 3. Period Total. 8S 4 MS 40%. 8S 4 MS 40%.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span> II. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Check up - Check the preparation of Ss. 3.Testing time: - Time allowance: 45’ B.Questions. I. Choose the best answer. (4p) 1. ”....................” means not buying products which are overpacked. a. Reducing b. Recycling c. Reusing 2. Would you mind if I ................down the music ? It’s too loud here. a. turned b. turn c. am turning 3. Would you mind ................. in the front seat of the taxi, Mark ? a. to sit b. sit c. sitting. 4. I.............. do it for you. I promise. a. will b. should c. would 5. ” Romeo and Juliet “ ...................by Shakespear. a. is written b. wrote c. was written. 6. Lan is used to..................up early in the morning now. a. get b. getting c. got. 7. The woman .................the red shirt is my Math teacher. a. wear b. wearing c. is wearing.. 8. A new stadium .................. next year. a. will build b. will be building c. will be built II. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning.(2p) 1.She bought a lot of flowers for her mother. -> A lot of flowers............................................... ......................................... 2.Lien didn’t finish her homework. ->Her homework.......................................... ................................................. 3. Thu is happy. She gets good marks. ( Adjective + to- infinitives ) ->Thu................................................. .......................................................... 4.Could I bring these flowers home ? -> Would you mind if......................................................... .........................? III. Match a place in A with what you can see there in B. ( 2p) A 1. Sapa 2. Nha Trang 3. Ho Chi Minh City. 4. Hue 1:............ 2: ............. 3: ............ 4: .............. IV. Read the passage and answer the questions. ( 2 p) An creasing number of people are now going on holiday to Egypt. Last year, for example, about one and a half million tourists visited Egypt. The population of Egypt is about fifty million and the capital is EL Qahira ( Cairo) , a busy city of just under nine million people. Although the climate is hot and dry. A. B. C. D..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span> and most of the country is desert, the average temperature from October to March is not too high . The most famous sights are the pyramids at giza. Questions: 1. Are there many visitors to Egypt every year ? 2.What is the population of Egypt ? 3. What is the climate in Egypt like ? 4.What are the most famous sights in Egypt ? III. Answer keys and points I. Choose the best answer. (4p) (0,5 p for each correct answer). 1. ”....................” means not buying products which are overpacked. a. Reducing b. Recycling c. Reusing 2. Would you mind if I ................down the music ? It’s too lound here. a. turned b. turn c. am turning 3. Would you mind ................. in the front seat of the taxi, Mark ? a. to sit b. sit c. sitting. 4. I.............. do it for you. I promise. a. will b. should c. would 5. ” Romeo and juliet “ ...................by Shakespear. a. is written b. wrote c. was written. 6. Lan is used to..................up early in the morning now. a. get b. getting c. got. 7. The woman .................the red shirt is my Math teacher. a. wear b. wearing c. is wearing.. 8. A new stadium .................. next year. a. will build b. will be building c. will be built II.Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning.(2p) (0,5 p for each correct answer). 1.She bought a lot of flowers for her mother. ->A lot of flowers were bought for her mother. 2.Lien didn’t finish her homework. ->Her homework wasn’t finished by Lien 3. Thu is happy. She gets good marks. ->Thu is happy to get good marks. 4.Could I bring these flowers home ? -> Would you mind if I brought these flowers home ? III.Match a place in A with what you can see there in B. ( 2p) (0,5 p for each correct answer). A 1. Sapa 2. Nha Trang 3. Ho Chi Minh City. 4. Hue 1:......C...... 2: .......A......3: ....B........ 4: ....D.......... IV.Read the passage and answer the questions. ( 2 p)(0,5 p for each correct answer). 1-Yes,there are. 2- The population of Egypt is about fifty million. 3-It is hot and dry. 4- The most famous sights are the pyramids at giza. 4. Consolidation. - Collect all testing paper - Give the remark of the test.. A. B. C. D..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span> 5.Homework. -Ask Ss to prepare Unit 12- Getting started & listen and read. ----------------------***-------------------------. T: Unit 12: A vacation abroad Period 73: Lesson 1 : Getting started & listen and read. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to continue with the topic tourism with famous places in the world such as: Canada, American, Britain. -To drill Ss listening and reading skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Include: bao gåm. The following evening: buæi tèi h«m sau Unfortunately: thËt kh«ng may Pick up: đón ( pick sb up ). III.Language focus. - The simple future tense. IV.Language skills. - Listening and reading. V. Preparation: - Textbook ,tape , cassette and pictures of famous places . VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : Retell the main famous resorts in Vietnam ? 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. - Hang the pictures and ask Ss to play Net works.. P:24/02/2013 Countries..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span> -Ask some pairs to complete the schedule of Mrs Quyen. Date. Mon25. B. Getting started. Sche Coming -Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the Dule to San text book. Francisco -Work in pairs to match the name of the countries in the box with appropriate pictures/ flags. -Share the answers with the partners and read aloud.And explain the answers why you choose this. + Why do you know it is The United States of America? Because I can see the Statue of Liberty. ................................................ -Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking questions. S1: Among those countries , Which country do you like to visit most? S2: I like to visit Britain. S1: Why? S2: Because I can see alot of ancient and famous royal places and buildings there. C. Presentation - Introduce the topic of the lesson by asking the questions:  Who are they in the picture?  What are they doing ?  Where are they ?  What are they talking about? + Introduce the new words: Include: bao gåm. The following evening: buæi tèi h«m sau Unfortunately: thËt kh«ng may Pick up: đón ( pick sb up ). D. Practice. -Ask Ss to read the dialogue and role play the dialogue.. Tue26 wed27 Thu28 going Having leaving out dinner San Francisco. -The others give the remark. -Ask some pairs to answer the questions aloud. a) No, they won’t.Because they are coming on a tour, their accommodation included on the ticket price.So they will stay at the hotel. b) No, he won’t.He will have a business meeting in the evening. c) Her friend will pick her up ai the hotel E. Production -Ask Ss to role play the dialogue. 4.Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson. 5.Home work: - Do Ex 1 in the work book ( page 70). -Ask Ss to prepare :Speak & Listen -----------------------***-------------------------P:24/2/2013 12: A vacation abroad T: Period 74: Lesson 2: Speak. Unit. I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to use the language in the tourist advertisement by using the words:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span> rate per night, single, douple,room, facilities............ and provided the structure the words used in the weather forecast and the adjective ( dry, cold......., degree , minus degree, zero degree............. ) - To drill Ss speaking skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Via: ®i qua. Rate per night : giá phòng/ đêm Single /double room: phßng đơn / đôi Facilities: cơ sở vật chất Gym: Phßng tËp thÓ dôc Business center: Trung t©m héi nghÞ th¬ng m¹i. III.Language focus. - The simple future tense. IV.Language skills. - Speaking. V. Preparation: - Textbook ,tape , cassette and pictures of famous places . VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : - Ask Ss to do the exercise 1 in the work book. 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. Ask Ss to retell the interesting places in the world. -Write on the BB. Read the words written. Big Ben.. The statue of Liberty. Ha long bay. The red square. The Sydney Opera house The great wall. The great pyramid. The lean tower. The petronas twin tower. B. Pre- speaking. - Introduce the topic of the lesson and give the meaning of the new words. Via: ®i qua. Rate per night : giá phòng/ đêm Single /double room: phßng đơn / đôi Facilities: cơ sở vật chất Gym: Phßng tËp thÓ dôc Business center: Trung t©m héi nghÞ th¬ng m¹i. - Ask Ss to read the words in chorus after teacher. C.While –speaking. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to use the information of the brochures and the About the flights to complete your itinerary. Use the followings as prompts in your conversation. ( in the text book page 113 ). - Ask Ss to write the itinerary in pair . And write on the BB. - Read the itinirary aloud. - Give the guided dialogue. A: Where shall we stay ? B: We’ll stay at Atlantic Hotel. The price is reasonable and it also have a swimming pool..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span> A: What time shall we leave Los Angeles ? B: The flight will depart at 14.00 on Monday and we ‘ll arrive in Boston at 18.00. As scheduled, we’ll leave Boston on Thursday. A: What are we going to do then? B: We’ll visit Boston University, Art galleries and eat sea food. - Read aloud the dialogue . D. Post- speaking. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to write the tourist advertisement and then ask Ss to write the scheledue to these advertisements. Hong Ngoc Hotel. Tel: 04.5657432. Fax:04.5658907 Rate per night : 100-120 VND, single 150180VNd, douple. Facilities : Restaurant, swimming pool, sauna 4.Consolidation. - Retell the main content of the lesson 5. Homework : - Write the dialogue about the schedule of the tour. -Do exercise 2+3 in the work book. -----------------------***--------------------------. P:24/2/2013 12: A vacation abroad. Unit. T: Period 75: Lesson 3: Listen I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to use the language in the tourist advertisement by using the words: rate per night, single, douple,room, facilities............ and provided the structure the words used in the weather forecast and the adjective ( dry, cold......., degree , minus degree, zero degree............. ) - To drill Ss listening skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Via: ®i qua. Rate per night : giá phòng/ đêm Single /double room: phßng đơn / đôi Facilities: cơ sở vật chất Gym: Phßng tËp thÓ dôc Business center: Trung t©m héi nghÞ th¬ng m¹i. III.Language focus. - The simple future tense. IV.Language skills. - Listening. V. Preparation: - Textbook ,tape , cassette and pictures of famous places . VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : - Ask Ss to do the exercise 1 in the work book. 3.New lesson :.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span> C. Warm up. Ask Ss to retell the interesting places in the world. -Write on the BB. Read the words written. Big Ben. The statue of Liberty. Ha long bay. The red square. The Sydney Opera house The great wall. The great pyramid. The lean tower. The petronas twin tower. A. Pre- listening. - Introduce the lesson and ask Ss the question about the weather.  What is the weather like today ?  What is the weather like in Spring / Summer, /Fall/ and winter in Vietnam ?  Which season do you like best ? Why ? C. While –listening. -Ask Ss to listen to the tape to complete the table with the weather information about the big cities in the world. - The information includes weather characteristics and the details of temperature in the cities. - Play the tape three times and ask Ss to work in pairs to discuss and compare the answer to their friends. - Write the answer on the BB. - Read the answer aloud. - Check if necessary. - Provide the new words:. Minus degree: độ âmZero degree: không độ Degree centigrate: độ C D. Post- listening. - Ask Ss to write the weather forcast about the big cities. - Compare to friends. - Check if neccessary. + Read the weather forcast aloud. + Hanoi today will be dry and windy , with a low of fifteen and a high of twenty two. + Ho Chi Minh will be a dry day today, and warm. For the temperature, the low will be twenty, and the high will be twenty six degree. 4.Consolidation. - Retell the main content of the lesson 5. Homework : - Write the dialogue about the schedule of the tour. -Do exercise 2+3 in the work book. -----------------------***-------------------------DuyÖt : 25/2/20 13 T T N g u y Ô n S ü Q.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span> u a n g. P:03/3/2013 Unit 12: A vacation abroad T: Period 76: Lesson 4: Read. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to be provided theimportance knownledge about the famous places in Amarica: Hawaii, New york, Chicago, Mouth Rushmore, Sanfrancisco.......... -To drill Ss reading skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Lava: dung nham. Pour out: tu«n trµo ,phun Fisherman’s Wharf : BÕn c¶ng Ng phñ Napa Valley: Thung lòng Napa Carve: ch¹m kh¾c. The windy city: thµnh phè léng giã On the shore of : ..trªn bê The Empire State Building:Cao èc Empire III.Language focus. - The simple past tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading.. V. Preparation: - Textbook, tape, cassette and pictures of famous places . VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : - Ask Ss to do the exercise given by teacher last period: write the itinerary of the journey from Thanh Ba to Nha Trang ? 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. - Play the hang man with the places we are going to learn in the lesson: Hawaii, Sanfrancisco......... B. Pre-reading. - Introduce the lesson by asking the questions about Mrs Quyen and her husband.  Do you remember Mrs Quyen?  What did she have ? - Aks Ss to read the reading to find out the places that Mrs Quyen and her husband visited. - Provide the meaning of the new words: Lava: dung nham. Pour out: tu«n trµo ,phun Fisherman’s Wharf : BÕn c¶ng Ng phñ Napa Valley: Thung lòng Napa Carve: ch¹m kh¾c.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span> The windy city: thµnh phè léng giã On the shore of : ..trªn bê The Empire State Building:Cao èc Empire -Read the new words aloud in chorus C. While- reading. - Read the postcard from MrsQuyen to her chidren in silence to write things she did at the places she visited. - Ask Ss to write the answer on the BB. + Hawaii: Went shopping, visited Kilauea Volcano. + New york:Went shopping, bought alot of souvernirs + Chicago: Saw lake Michigan +Mount Rushmore: Saw the heads of four American presidents. + Sanfrancisco: Visited Fisher man’s Wharf, the napa valley, wine growing area and the Alcatraz prison -Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to complete the table. Check if necessary. -Ask Ss to read the reading again and answer the questions in Exercise 2. -Compare the answer with the friends. -Write the answer on the BB, and read the answers aloud .( work in pairs ) a)She went there by plane. b)She saw the famous prison on the island of Alcatraz in the middle of Sanfrancisco Bay . c)It is amout where the heads of four American presidents are carved into the rock ( It can be seen from more than 100 miles away.). d)The other name of Chicago is the The windy City e) She went shopping - Check if necessary. D. Post- reading. -Ask Ss to list the famous places that are mentioned in the reading 4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson. 5 Homework. - Do exercise 3 in the work book. -Ask Ss to prepare : Write -----------------------***--------------------------. P: 03/3/2013 Unit 12: A vacation abroad T: Period 77: Lesson 5: Write I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to use the language to write the postcard. And how to write the words on the post cards. -To drill Ss writing skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III.Language focus. - The simple past tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading. V. Preparation: - Textbook and pictures of famous places . VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span> Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do exercise 3 in the work book ( Page 71) 3.New lesson : A . Warm up: -Ask Ss to list the things you often do when visit famous places: -Work in pairs to discuss and write the sentences on the BB.  Sight seeing.  Take photographs.  Buy post cards to send to friends. ....................................... ................. B. Pre- writing. - Introduce the lesson by asking Ss to write the sentences that they often write on the post cards.( may be in Vietnamese) - Ask Ss to look at the first postcard that Mrs Quyen sent from the USA. - Read the post card and fill in the blanks. - Ask Ss work in pairs to read the post card and fill in the missing words. - Write the answers on the BB. - Read the answers aloud. Dear Sally, We are having a wonderful time in the USA. The people are friendly and the weather has been warm and sunny. In San francisco,I visited my friends, Sandra Smith and her family. It was nice to see them.. I bought lots of souvenirs for the childen. Thanh is always complaining about the heaviness of my suitcase. See you soon. Love , Quyen - Check if necessary. C. while- writing. - Ask Ss imagine to be a tourist on a vacation in a certain place in Viet nam.Write a postcard to a friend about the trip. Read the information in the text book for help.( the place , the people, the weather, the famous places, and presents for relatives. - Read the writing in pairs to check themselves. Dear Nam, I am having a wonderful time in Ha long Bay. The people here are very hospitable and friendly. We ‘re lucky, The weather has been fine and sunny during the trip. I saw alot of caves here . They are really beautiful. I bought lots of presents and books about Ha long Bay. See you soon. Your friend, Lan - Give the remark if necessary. Dear Lan, We’re having a well time on Cat Ba island. The islanders is very friendship and helpful. The weather has been sunny and windy. In Cat Ba town , I visited my aunt , Mrs Lien and his childen.I spend the whole morning to play with the kids. I bought lots of souvernirs and two bottle of fish sauce . Shopping here are wonderful.There are alot to buy..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span> See you soon . Yours trully. Tuan. D. Post –writing. - Ask Ss to read the letter and then correct the mistake in the letter. - Write the incorrect letter and then write them. 4.Consolidation : - Retell the way to write the post card. 5.Home work: - Do exercise 4+5 in the work book ( Page 72-73). -----------------------***-------------------------P: 03/3/2013 Unit 12: A vacation abroad T: Period 78: Lesson 6: Language focus. I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to review the past continous tense and the use of always in the present continous tense. - To drill Ss writing and reading skills . II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III.Language focus. - The past progressive tense and the present progressive tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook and pictures of famous places . VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization:. Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do exercise 4+5 in the work book ( Page 72-73). 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. Ask Ss to read the post card that they wrote to friends to tell them the journey that they are going on. - Give the remark if necessary. B. The past progressive tense. a. Presentation. - Ask Ss to give the form and the uses of the past progressive tense. - Make examples with the sentences. + The form: S + was/were + V-ing + O + The use: - Express the action that was happening at the fix time in the past. Eg: I was watching TV at 7 p.m last night. - Express the action that was happening , and the other action happened. Eg: I was watching TV when the phone rang. - Express two actions was happening at the same time in the past. Eg: I was doing my homework while my mother was watching TV. - Read the examples aloud. b. Practice. - Ask Ss to do the exercise in the text book.( p: 119). b) Hoa was eating dinner at 8 o’clock. c) Bao was doing his home work at 8 o’clock..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span> d) Nga was writing a letter at 8 o’clock. e) Na was walking with her dog at 8 o’clock. Ex2: Match the sentences in A with the sentenes in B. a-C , b- F ,c- E , d-B , e- D , f –A. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the exercise 2 in the text book. c. Production - Ask Ss to retell the use of the past progressive tense used in this exercise and give the examples; C. Always in the present progressive tense. a) Presentation. -Ask Ss to give the theory of the word” always’ in this tense. He is always talking in the class. b) Practice. - Ask Ss to complete the exercise 3 in the text book ( p: 120). Work in pairs. a) Bao is always forgetting his home work. b) Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella. c) Mr and Mrs Thanh are always missing the bus. d) Nam is always watching TV. e) Na is always talking on the phone. f) Liem is always going out. - Read the sentences aloud. - Write the sentences on the BB. - Check if necessary. c) Production. - Ask Ss to make the complaint by making the examples. - Read the sentences aloud. - Write the sentences on the BB. 1) Ha is always making a phone call.. 2) My teacher is always complaining about my studying. 3) My mother is always complaining about my laziness. 4. Consolidation: -Ask Ss to give the main content of the lesson. 5. Home work: - Ask Ss to do the exercise 6+7 in the work book ( p: 74-75) - Prepare the new lesson Unit 13: Getting started & listen and read . -----------------------***-------------------------Pre:03/3/2013 Period 79: test CORRECTION T: I.Objectives: - During the lesson Ss will be able to realizetheir weakness and how to improve their skills. II.Vocabulary. - Places. III.Language focus. - Would you mind if I, Would you mind, be used to and passive voice. IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - During the lesson. 3. Testing correction: * Questions..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span> I. Choose the best answer. (4p) 1. ”....................” means not buying products which are overpacked. a. Reducing b. Recycling c. Reusing 2. Would you mind if I ................down the music ? It’s too loud here. a. turned b. turn c. am turning 3. Would you mind ................. in the front seat of the taxi, Mark ? a. to sit b. sit c. sitting. 4. I.............. do it for you. I promise. a. will b. should c. would 5. ” Romeo and Juliet “ ...................by Shakespear. a. is written b. wrote c. was written. 6. Lan is used to..................up early in the morning now. a. get b. getting c. got. 7. The woman .................the red shirt is my Math teacher. a. wear b. wearing c. is wearing. 8. A new stadium .................. next year. a. will build b. will be building c. will be built II. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning.(2p) 1.She bought a lot of flowers for her mother. -> A lot of flowers............................................... ......................................... 2.Lien didn’t finish her homework.. ->Her homework.......................................... ................................................. 3. Thu is happy. She gets good marks. ( Adjective + to- infinitives ) ->Thu................................................. .......................................................... 4.Could I bring these flowers home ? -> Would you mind if......................................................... .........................? III. Match a place in A with what you can see there in B. ( 2p) A 1. Sapa 2. Nha Trang 3. Ho Chi Minh City. 4. Hue 1:............ 2: ............. 3: ............ 4: .............. IV. Read the passage and answer the questions. ( 2 p) An creasing number of people are now going on holiday to Egypt. Last year, for example, about one and a half million tourists visited Egypt. The population of Egypt is about fifty million and the capital is EL Qahira ( Cairo) , a busy city of just under nine million people. Although the climate is hot and dry and most of the country is desert, the average temperature from October to March is not too high . The most famous sights are the pyramids at giza. Questions: 2. Are there many visitors to Egypt every year ? 2.What is the population of Egypt ? 3. What is the climate in Egypt like ? 4.What are the most famous sights in Egypt ? III. Answer keys and points. A. B. C. D..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span> I. Choose the best answer. (4p) (0,5 p for each correct answer). 1. ”....................” means not buying products which are overpacked. a. Reducing b. Recycling c. Reusing 2. Would you mind if I ................down the music ? It’s too lound here. a. turned b. turn c. am turning 3. Would you mind ................. in the front seat of the taxi, Mark ? a. to sit b. sit c. sitting. 4. I.............. do it for you. I promise. a. will b. should c. would 5. ” Romeo and juliet “ ...................by Shakespear. a. is written b. wrote c. was written. 6. Lan is used to..................up early in the morning now. a. get b. getting c. got. 7. The woman .................the red shirt is my Math teacher. a. wear b. wearing c. is wearing. 8. A new stadium .................. next year. a. will build b. will be building c. will be built II.Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning.(2p) (0,5 p for each correct answer). 1.She bought a lot of flowers for her mother. ->A lot of flowers were bought for her mother. 2.Lien didn’t finish her homework. ->Her homework wasn’t finished by Lien. 3. Thu is happy. She gets good marks. ->Thu is happy to get good marks. 4.Could I bring these flowers home ? -> Would you mind if I brought these flowers home ? III.Match a place in A with what you can see there in B. ( 2p) (0,5 p for each correct answer). A 1. Sapa 2. Nha Trang 3. Ho Chi Minh City. 4. Hue 1:......C...... 2: .......A......3: ....B........ 4: ....D.......... IV.Read the passage and answer the questions. ( 2 p)(0,5 p for each correct answer). 1-Yes,there are. 2- The population of Egypt is about fifty million. 3-It is hot and dry. 4- The most famous sights are the pyramids at giza. 4. Consolidation - Remind Ss some common mistakes they have 5. Home work. -Note the way to have better written test. - Prepare new lesson.Write.. A. B. C. D.. -----------------------***-------------------------DuyÖt : 04/3/20 13 T T.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span> N g u y Ô n S ü Q u a n g P:17/3/2013 T: 13: Festivals. Unit. Period 80: Lesson 1: Getting started & listen and read. I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic ( festivals) like : rice- cooking festival fire- making contest, Waterfetching contest......, - To drill Ss speaking and reading skills . II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Wate- fetching festival: héi thi lÊy níc. Fire-making: héi thi nhãm löa Starting possition: ®iÓm xuÊt ph¸t. Yell: la hÐt, cæ vò III.Language focus. - The present progressive tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading and listening. V. Preparation: - Tape and cassette,textbook and pictures. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization:. Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do exercise 6+7 in the work book ( Page 75)? 3.New lesson : A. Getting started. - Ask Ss to work in group of five and then you should answer the questions: Where should they go on their visits to Vietnam.? 1.Tom likes swimming , and sunbathing. A: In my oppion, where should Tom go? B: I think he should go to Doson beach because it’s a beutiful beach and not verry far from Hanoi. B. Presentation. - Introduce the topic of the lesson. -ask Ss to give some festivals that they can see in their villages. + Water –fetching festival. + Rice-cooking festival. + Fire-making festival. - Explain the exercise ‘s order. - Play the tape twice. - Give some new words.: Wate- fetching festival: héi thi lÊy níc. Fire-making: héi thi nhãm löa Starting possition: ®iÓm xuÊt ph¸t. Yell: la hÐt, cæ vò C. Practice. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in silence and complete the table. Ask Ss to giveContests the answers. What they do Water- fetching. Fire- making. Rice- cooking.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span> T: Period 81: Lesson 2: Speak & Listen - Ask some Ss to write on the BB. - Give the correct answers. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to read the dialogue and decide which sentence is true or false. - Ask Ss to write the correct answers on the BB. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue aloud. - Check if necessary. - Explain the compound noun. + Form: A ricecooking festival A water- fetching competition. A firematching Article) (noun ) (verbing) ( noun) - Ask Ss to write down on the book and make the sentences with the compound nouns, D. Production. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to list the festivals in Vietnam. - Spring festival. - Village festival - Dong Da festival 4. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to retell the main content of the lesson : The festivals in Vietnam. And name some festivals. 5. Home work: -Do exercise 1 in the work book ( p: 76). -Prepare Speak & Listen. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to Prepare for the Tet holiday: the great holiday in Vietnam : Tidy the rooms, peach blossom, a bunch of flower, marigold, spring rolls -To drill Ss speaking and listening skills . II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Pomegranates Sweetie III.Language focus. - The present progressive tense and the perfect present tense. IV.Language skills. - Speaking and listening. V. Preparation: - Tape and cassette,textbook and pictures. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do exercise 1 in the work book ( Page 76)? 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. Game: Network Vietnamese Festivals. P:17/3/2013 Unit 13: Festivals. Fire- making.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span> B. Pre- speaking. - Introduce the lesson and aks Ss to answer teacher ‘squestions.  What do you usually do before Tet?  What is the most important to prepare for Tet? - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and arrange the sentences in the correct order. - Give the meaning of new word and ask ss to write down the new words. Pomegranates: qu¶ lùu Sweetie: con yªu - Ask Ss to give the correct answers. C. While-speaking. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice speaking about the work they’ll do for Tet. - Give the guided words and ask Ss to practice speaking. - Call some pairs to speak before the class. - Ask Ss to practice talking about preparing for the festivals. - Give the modals; + A school festival: - decorate our classroom. - clean the windows. - cover the teacher’s table with the plastic towel. - Everyone is ready for the sport activities and cultural activities organized on Saturday. - Buy flowers for the meeting. - Call some pairs to speaking aloud in front of the class. D. Pre- listening. Ask Ss to dicuss about the things they prepare for Tet holiday. + What kind of food / fruits/ flowers you have to prepare for Tet?. Food: trung cake, candies, dried watermelon seeds, jam,..... Fruit: bananas, grapes,..... Flowers: Peach blossoms, apricot blossoms, marigold, roses................... E. While- listening. - Play the tape twice and Ask Ss to listen to fill in the gaps. - Write the correct answers on the BB. - Read aloud the answers. a) Mrs Robinson wants Mr Robinson to go to the flower market. b) Mrs Robinson wanls some marigolds because they are traditional at Tet. c) Mrs Robinson want Liz to buy a packet of dried water melon seeds. d) Mrs Robinson is asking Mrs Nga how to make spring rolls. - Play the tape again to complete the table. - Ask Ss to write the answers on the BB. Mr Robinson: go to the market to buy peach blossoms and marigolds. Liz: buy some candy and dried water melon seeds. Mrs Robinson:learn how to make spring roll. 4.Consolidation: -Retell the main content of the lesson: How to prepare for Tet. 5.Home work: - Do exercise 2 in the work book - Prepare part :Read. -----------------------***-------------------------P:17/3/2013 13: Festivals T: 82:Lesson 3:Read. Unit Period.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span> I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the festivals in the world.: The Christmas festival . - To drill Ss the traditional customs of the Chrismas festival: The Chrismas tree, the Chrismas card, the Chrismas Carols, , and Santa Claus. - To drill Ss reading skill. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Chistmas tree: c©y th«ng Noel. Christmas cards:thiÕp chóc mõng. Christmas Carols: Nh÷ng bµi th¸nh ca. Santa Claus: «ng giµ Noel Patron Saint: thánh đỡ đầu. Design: thiÕt kÕ. Spread: lan truúªn III.Language focus. - The simple past tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading. V. Preparation: - Textbook and pictures. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test: - Ask Ss to do exercise 2 in the work book ( Page 77) 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. - Ask ss to play the Guessing game:. 1st clue; This is the biggest festival in the western countries. 2ndclue: People often decorate a tree and exchange the best wishes by giving cards to others. 3rd clue: It is on December 25. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to dicuss the correct answer. - Give the correct answer. B. Pre- reading. - Introduce the topic of the lesson and aks Ss to give some things they know about the Christmas. - Give some new words: Chistmas tree: c©y th«ng Noel. Christmas cards:thiÕp chóc mõng. Christmas Carols: Nh÷ng bµi th¸nh ca. Santa Claus: «ng giµ Noel Patron Saint: thánh đỡ đầu. Design: thiÕt kÕ. Spread: lan truúªn - Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus. C. While- reading. - Ask Ss to read the reading in silence and complete the table about the history and the origins of some Christmas specials. - Work in pairs to dicuss the answers and the share the answers to the partners. - Write the answers on the BB. - Read the answers aloud.. Christmas Specials. Place of origin. The Christmas Tree. Riga. The Christmas Card Christmas Carols Santa claus. England No information USA. Date. Early 1500s. Mid-19th century 800years ago 1823.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span> - Ask Ss to read the reading again and then answer the questions in the text book. - Call Ss to write the answers on the BB. - Read aloud the answers. a) More than a century ago. b) He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends. c) 800 years ago. d) An American professor Clement Clarke Moore. e) On the description of Saint Nicholas in professor Moore’s poem. - Check if necessary. - Explain the new words: Have sb do smt : yêu cầu ai đó lµm g×. Unsuitable: Kh«ng trë l¹i Popular again: Phæ biÕn trë l¹i A fat jolly man:Ngời đàn ông mËp m¹p, vui tÝnh. D-Post –reading: - Ask ss to re-do true or false exercise. 4. Consolidation. - Ask Ss to retell the main content of the reading: Christmas. 5. Home work. -Ask ss to do the exercise 3,4(page 78-79) in the work book. - Prepare part : Write. -----------------------***--------------------------. P:17/3/2013 13: Festivals T: 83: Lesson 4: Write. Unit Period. I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the Vietnamese festivals: such as the rice- cooking.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span> festival, the fire –making fastival, the water- fetching festival . - To drill Ss writing skill. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III.Language focus. - The simple past tense. IV.Language skills. - Writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test Ask Ss to do exercise 2+3+4 in the work book ( Page 77+78) 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to list the traditional festivals in Vietnam .And The things that relate to the Christmas. - Ask Ss to write the words on the BB. - Read the words aloud. Vietnamese traditional festival:  The cooking –rice festival.  The fire –making festival.  The Water- fetching festival.  The spring festival.  The village festival. The Christmas :  The Christmas tree.  The Christmas cards.  The Christmas Carols.  The Santa Claus. B.Pre- Writing.. - Introduce the lesson and by asking the question: + Which traditional festival is in the picture? - Ask Ss to read the dialogue ( p 121) to fill in the gap in this report. - Read the report aloud. - Write the answers on the BB.: 1) Rice- cooking festival. 2) One. 3) Water- fetching. 4) Run. 5) Water. 6) Traditional 7) bamboo. 8) Six. 9) Separate. 10) Added. - Check if necessary. C. While- writing. - Ask Ss to write the similar report on a festival you enjoyed. - Ask ss to use the modal below: Name: Place: Length: Activities: How: Comments: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to share the answer to friends. - Give the guiding writing. The mid- autumn festival. This report shows how the Mid- Autumn festival was held in my neighborhood. The Mid autumn festival was held on the 15th of August ( According to Lunar Calendar) This festival was speacially organized for children. It was held in the yard of the Cultural House in my village. The main festival lasted about three hours when the Moon is at its fullest..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span> During the festival, children took part in various activities like ; singing and shouting, wearing masks, parading on the roads and banging the dums. Beside , Children ate a very special cake called Moon Cake. I think this festival is a very special occasion for Vietnamese people and for children to play and enjoy on variety of activities.Moreover , Children would understand more about Vietnamese traditions. D. Post-writing. - Teacher ask Ss to answer the questions about the writing given. What is the name of the festival? When is it held? Where is it organized? 4. Consolidation - Ask ss to retell the main content of the lesson.( the writing ) 5. Home work - Do the exercise 8 in the work book ( p 82). P:24/3/2013 Unit 13: Festivals duyÖt:18/3/2 T: Period 84: 013 Lesson 5: Language focus TT. I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammar structure (The Reported speech) and the passive voice and the compoud noun NguyÔ- To drill Ss reading and writing n Sü skills. QuangII.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III.Language focus. - The simple past tense and the passive voice. IV.Language skills. - Reading - writing..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span> V. Preparation: - Textbook and pictures. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do exercise 8 in the work book ( Page 82)? 3.New lesson: A-Warm up. - Ask Ss to write the words to fill in the table. - Work in group to find the words that are in the correct functions.. B-Passive voice. a) Presentation. - Ask ss to give the form of the passive voice and aks them to work in pairs to complete the exercise in the text book. Be + past participle.. b) Practice. - Write the answers on the BB. - Read the sentences. a) Christmas songs were performed for people in towns and villages....... b) On Christmas Eve in early 1500s, tree was decorated and put in the market place........... c) In the rice –cooking festival, a fire is made in the traditional way.. d) An English speaking contest will be held at Nguyen Hue school next month. e) The first prize was awarded to the Mekong team....... f) The Christmas “ Silent night ....” was written in Austria ......... c) Production. - Ask Ss to give the form of the present perfect tense in the passive form. - Give the meaning of new words : Jumble : lµm lén xén Scatter: r¶i r¾c, b¾n tung toÐ. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise. - Write the answers on the BB. Adjec Verbs 1) jumpled. Noun tives Present past P P 2) Broken. 3) Broken. Festival lucky give gave given 4) Scattered. 5) Pulled. C-Compound noun. a) Presentation. - Give the form of the compound noun and ask Ss to complete the exercise in the text book. b) Practice. - Work in pairs to do the exercise. - Wtite the answers on the BB. a) It is a fire- making contest.. b) It is a bull- fighting festival. c) It is a car- making industry. d) It is a flower-arranging contest. e) It is a rice- exporting country. f) It is a clothe - washing machine. c) Production. - Read aloud the sentences. D. The reported speech. a) Presentation. - Ask Ss to retell the changes when they rewrite the reperted speech. Ex: Marry said, “I am tired now “.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span>  Marry said that she was tired at once. b) Practice. Ss work in pairs to write the sentences on the BB. And read the sentences aloud. b) He said that he could fix the faucets. c) He said that the pipes were broken. d) He said that new pipes were very expensive. e) He said that I had to pay him then. c) Production. Note : must -> had to.( in reported speech ). 4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: The passive, the reported speech,compound noun. 5. Home work : - Ask ss to write the sentences in the ex 2 ( p79) ----------------------***-------------------------. P:24/3/2013 Unit 13: Festivals T: Period 85: Lesson 6: Language focus (Cont) I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammar structure (The Reported speech) and the passive voice and the compoud noun - To drill Ss reading and writing skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III.Language focus. - The simple past tense and the passive voice. IV.Language skills. - Reading - writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook and pictures. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span> Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do exercise 8 in the work book ( Page 82)? 3.New lesson: A-Warm up. - Ask Ss to write the words to fill in the table. - Work in group to find the words that are in the correct functions.. B-Passive voice. b) Presentation. - Ask ss to give the form of the passive voice and aks them to work in pairs to complete the exercise in the text book. Be + past participle.. b) Practice. - Write the answers on the BB. - Read the sentences. f) Christmas songs were performed for people in towns and villages....... g) On Christmas Eve in early 1500s, tree was decorated and put in the market place........... h) In the rice –cooking festival, a fire is made in the traditional way. i) An English speaking contest will be held at Nguyen Hue school next month. j) The first prize was awarded to the Mekong team....... f) The Christmas “ Silent night ....” was written in Austria ......... c) Production.. - Ask Ss to give the form of the present perfect tense in the passive form. - Give the meaning of new words : Jumble : lµm lén xén Scatter: r¶i r¾c, b¾n tung toÐ. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise. - Write the answers on the BB. 6) jumpled. Adjec Verbs 7) Broken. Noun tives Present past P P 8) Broken. 9) Scattered. Festival lucky give gave given 10) Pulled. C-Compound noun. b) Presentation. - Give the form of the compound noun and ask Ss to complete the exercise in the text book. b) Practice. - Work in pairs to do the exercise. - Wtite the answers on the BB. g) It is a fire- making contest.. h) It is a bull- fighting festival. i) It is a car- making industry. j) It is a flower-arranging contest. k) It is a rice- exporting country. l) It is a clothe - washing machine. c) Production. - Read aloud the sentences. D. The reported speech. f) Presentation. - Ask Ss to retell the changes when they rewrite the reperted speech. Ex: Marry said, “I am tired now “  Marry said that she was tired at once. g) Practice. Ss work in pairs to write the sentences on the BB. And read the sentences aloud. b) He said that he could fix the faucets..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span> h) He said that the pipes were broken. i) He said that new pipes were very expensive. j) He said that I had to pay him then. c) Production. Note : must -> had to.( in reported speech ). 4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: The passive, the reported speech,compound noun. 5. Home work : - Ask ss to write the sentences in the ex 2 ( p79) - Ss prepare Unit 14:Wonders of the world. ----------------------***-------------------------. P:24/3/2013 T: Unit 14: Wonders of the world. Period 86: Lesson 1:Getting started & Listen and read I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the world heritages , such as: The Sydney Opera house, The great pyramids, The great wall. - To drill Ss reading and speaking skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. The pyramids. Sydney Opera House. Stonehenge. III.Language focus. - The simple past tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading,listening and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook and pictures. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… ….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span> 2.Oral test: Ask Ss to do exercise 2 in the work book ( Page 79)? 3.New lesson . A. Warm up. - Ask Ss to play the game : Guessing picture. -Provide the pictures of the wonders of the world. And ask Ss to work in pairs to give the name of each picture. - Write the name on the BB. - Read the words in English. a) the Great wall of China. b) The leaning Tower of Pisa. c) The Empire State Building. d) The Eiffel Tower. e) The Golden Gate Bridge. f) The Taj Mahal monument. B. Getting started. - Ask ss to look at the pictures in the book and work in pairs to match the names of these famous world landmarks to the correct pictures. a) The pyramids. b) Sydney Opera House. c) Stonehenge. - T give the correct answers. - Read the answers. C. Presentation. - Teacher introduce the topic of the lesson and ask Ss to listen to the tape to guess the game in the tape. - Play the tape and give the rule to play the game. - Ask ss to give the name of the places in the tape .. -Read aloud the name of the place in the tape. D.Practice. - Ask ss to read the dialogue in pairs. - Read the dialogue in aloudin pairs. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to fill in the summary. Using the words in the dialogue. - Write the answers on the Bb. - Read the answers aloud. - Read the summery aloud: Hoa, Nga and her cousin Nhi were bored , so Nga suggested that they play a (1) game called 20 Questions. She explained the rules and then the girls started to play. Nga thought of a ( 2) place and she give the others a ( 3) clue by saying that it wasn’t in ( 4) Vietnam. Nhi found out the place was in ( 5) America. Hoa thought it was the ( 6) Golden gate Bridge, but that is in Sanfrancisco. Nhi was ( 7) right when she said it ( 8) was the Statue of Liberty. E. Production. - Ask Ss to play the guessing game - Ss think of the famous places or famous person. - Ask one S who keeps the words give clue ( the information that helps the others to find the answer). - Ask Ss to use the Yes- No questions and the word keeper only says “ Yes” if the answer is right .And “ No “ if the answer is wrong. 4. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to give the main content of the lesson. 5.Home work.: - Write the name of the world heritages. Ký duyÖt:25/3/2013 TT.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span> A. Warm up. Ask Ss to list the famous places in the world that they know in English. -Write on the BB. NguyÔ-Read the words aloud. n Sü  The great wall. Quang  The great pyramids. P:31/3/2013 Unit  The Big ben tower. 14:Wonders of the world.  The Petronas twin tower. T: Period  Ha long Bay. 87: Lesson 2: Speak & Listen.  Eiffel tower.  Hue Citadel. I. Objectives :  ...................................... - After the lesson Ss will be able to B. Pre-speaking. ask and answer about the world -Introduce the lesson by giving the heritages. By using the indirect matching. questions to know more about the 1) It is in the central of Vietnam. world heritage: Great Barrier Reef, And it was regconized as a world and know how to use the words in heritage in 2003. advertisements. 2) It was constructed in Paris in -To drill Ss speaking and listening 1889 in the 100th celebration of skills. french Revolution. II.Vocabulary. 3) Ity was built more than 2000 - Explain some new words. years ago with the length of 4500 Jungle Crystal - clear miles and it is the only man made water structure that can be seen from Coral Sea Snorkel the space. III.Language focus. 4) It’s one of the world heritages of - The indirect speech: Vietnam. It consists of nearly 2000 IV.Language skills. islands with magnificient caves. - Speaking and listening 5)It is the great clock in London V. Preparation: which gives the GMT( Greenwich - Textbook and pictures. MeanTime). VI. Teaching procedure: 6)It is the skyscraper in New york. It 1. Organization: was constructedin 1930 with 102 Date:………… Class stories. 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: 7) It is the highest mountain in the ………………………………… world located in Nepal.It is 8848 Date:………… Class meters high and was named after the 8A2:.........……/25Absent: man who first reach to the peak of ……………………………… … the mountain. 2.Oral test : C-While –speaking. Ask Ss to do exercise 4 in the - Ask Ss to use the table in the text work book ( Page 80) book to practice asking and 3.New lesson:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span> answering the Yes- No questions.And tick in the table. - Introduce the indirect question. Direct: I said to / asked Hoa: “ Is Eiffel Tower in Germany?” Indirect: I asked Hoa if / whether Eiffel Tower was in Germany. -Ask Ss to give the form. -D. Post –speaking. - Ask Ss to use the indirect question to practice speaking about the world heritages. Eg: I asked Hoa If Phong Nha Cave was in the Southern Vietnam, She said that It wasn’t . A-Pre- listening. - Ask Ss to look at the lesson and write down the new words in the note book. Jungle: rõng. Crystal- clear water:Níc trong nh pha lª. Coral Sea: biÓn san h«. Snorkel: b¬i lÆn cã sö dông èng thë -Ask Ss to listen the tape and then correct the mistake of the listening. B. While- listening. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and then correct the mistakes. - Write the anwsers and then share the answers to their friends. -Read the answers aloud. -T correct if necessary. - Ask Ss to read the advertisement. Do you want a quiet , relaxing vacation? - Look no further than beautiful far north Queensland. Stay right on the beach at the coconut Palm Hotel. Take guided tours through the rainforest, swim in the crystal clear water of the coral Sea amd Snorkel. amongst the Coral of the great barrier Reef Marine Park- A World heritage site. -Call ( 077 ) 692439027 for more information. C. Post -listening. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and read aloud the listening. - Ask Ss to use the words to make the similar adertisement about the Hung King Temple. E. Practice. Change these sentences into indirect speech. 1) "My sister likes cooking,"said Nam. 2) “ We are learning how to make cakes,” Said the schoolgirls. 3) “ I can repair the bike myself”, my friend told me. 4) “ We are going to have an English- speaking club “, said Mai. 5) ”Do you want to visit dien Bien Phu, Lan ?”. I said. 6) “Does your brother study at a university, Nam?” Quang asked me. 7) “Is Halong Bay in Northern Vietnam, Phuong?” Mary asked Phuong. 4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson. 5. Home work : - Ask Ss to do the exercise3, 4 in the work book ( p85) ------------------------***-------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span> Knowing nothing about Taj Mahal:Cung ®iÖn Taj Mahal. Angkor wat. P:31/3/2013 Unit 14: Wonders of the world T: Period 88:Lesson 3: Read I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the world heritageAnd Ss will be provided the knowledge about the wonders of the world.Like Hanging gardens of Babylon, statue of Zeus, Taj Mahal, Angkor wat.......... - To drill Ss speaking skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Ancient Greece Compile Royal capital city Hanging garden of Babylon Statue of Zeus. Buddist religious center III.Language focus. - The simple past tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading V. Preparation: - Textbook and pictures. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : - Ask Ss to do exercise 4 in the work book ( Page 85)? 3.New lesson: A. Warm up. - Ask Ss to play the guessing game with 20 questions about the famous places or famous person in vietnam. Clue: It is in Vietnam, I think of a famous person. S1: Is he a man? S2: Is he a live? B.Pre- reading. - Introduce the lesson and then give the new words: Ancient Greece: Hy l¹p cæ đại.Compile:Biên tập Royal capital city: kinh thµnh Hanging garden of Babylon: vên treo Babylon. Statue of Zeus:tîng thÇn Dít..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span> Knowing nothing about: ch¨ng biÕt gì đến. Taj Mahal:Cung ®iÖn Taj Mahal. Angkor wat: đền Angkor wat. Buddist religious center: trung t©m phËt gi¸o. - Ask Ss to write down the new words and then read the new words aloud in chorus. C. while- reading. - Ask Ss to scan the reading and then work in pairs to do the matching. - Write the answers on the BB. - Ask Ss to read the reading and then complete the exercise in the text book. - Compare the answers to others, and then read the answers aloud. - Give the comment if necessary. D. Post- reading. - Ask ss to read aloud the reading and say something about the Pyramids and Angkor Wat. - Work in pairs to dicuss about the saying. a.(C )The only surviving wonder on Antipater’s list is the Pyramid of Cheops. b.(A). Angkor Wat was originally built for Hindus. c.( D). Angkor Wat was part of a royal Khmer city a long timre ago. D.(B) In the 1400s, the Khmer King chose Phnom Penh as the new capital. 4.Consolidation : - Ask ss to retell the main content of the lesson: The wonders of the worlds. 5. Home work - Ask Ss to read the reading again and then do exercise 5 ( p: 85 )in the work book.. -----------------------***--------------------------. P:31/3/2013 Unit 14:Wonders of the world. T: Period 89:Lesson 4 : Write I. Objectives : - After the lesson Ss will be able to be provided the information about the famous places : grand Canyon, Cuc Phuong national park.............. - To drill Ss writing skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Canyon Park ranger Giuded hike Edge Original inhabitants III.Language focus. - The past simple tense IV.Language skills. - Writing.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span> V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test: Ask Ss to do exercise 5 in the work book ( Page 85)? 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. - Ask Ss to play the net work. About the World Heritages side. - The Great wall in China. - The great Pyramids. - The leaning Tower. - The Eiffel Tower. - The Great Barrier Reef. - Halong Bay. .................................... B. Pre- writing. - Ask Ss to look at the letter in the text book , listen to the introduction about the order of the lesson and then complete the letter by using the sentences given. - Write the new words : Canyon: Khe nói. Park ranger: Ngêi gi÷ c«ng viªn. Giuded hike: Cuéc ®i bé cã híng dÉn viªn. Edge: R×a , mÐp. Original inhabitants: C d©n gốc của một nơi nào đó. - Read the new words aloud. - Write the answers on the BB.. - Ask Ss to read the completed letter aloud before the class. C. While- writing. - Ask ss to read the letter again and write the letter to friend to retell your friend about the famous place. - Ss have to use the information below: Place:. Distances from your city:. How to get there:. The World Heritages,. Sights:. Weather:. How you feel: - Ss work in pairs to write the letter, then share the answer to the partner. - T checks through the over head project. - Give the guided letter. April 12th ,2006. Dear........, How are you? I was very happy to get your letter some days ago. My class has just come back from atrip to Hung King Temple. A famous of interest in Phu Tho.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span> province. It is about 50 km from Ha hoa town ship, and it took us 2 hours to get there by car. The trip lasted only one day. Although it was summer, it was quite cool because there are many big and old trees there. We were very surprised that Hung King temple consisted of 4 big temples. They are Gieng Temple, Ha Temple, Trung Temple, and Thuong Temple. Hung King Temple was built many years ago to honor Hung King and our ancestors. After visted the big four temples , we went to Hung Vuong musuem. The guide showed us the history of the things there. And we took many photographs there. We felt very happy after the trip. I enclose a photo that I took during the trip. I hope you like it. What do you plan to do the summer vacation? Write to me soon. Your friend, Hoa. D. Post –writing. - Ask Ss to read the other letters that they have written. 4. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to retell the main content of the letter they have written. 5. Home work: - Ask Ss to write the letter to friend to retell about their last trip -----------------------***-------------------------P:31/3/2013 Unit 14: Wonders of the world T: Period 90: Lesson 5 : Language focus I. Objectives :. - After the lesson Ss will be able to revise the grammar : The indirect speech, the passive voice, Question words before to – infinitive.Complete the exercise in the text book. - To drill Ss reading and writing skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. Decide, Start, try , begin + toinfinitive. III.Language focus. - The passive voice. The indirect speech, Wh + To- infinitive. IV.Language skills. - Writing V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to show the letter written to friend ? 3.New lesson : A-Warm up. -Ask Ss to write the famous places in the world. -Work in pairs to write them on the BB. Sydney Opera House,Great Wall of China.Eiffel Tower.Statue of Liberty. Mount Everest. ........................................ B.Presentation A. Passive Voice. a) Presentation..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span> - Ask Ss to write the form of the passive voice , and then ask Ss to complete the exercise in the text book. a) was completed. b) Was constructed. c) Was desinged. d) Was presented. e) Was reached. b) Practice. - Work in pairs to do the exercise in the book. c) Production. - Ask Ss to read aloud the sentences. A. Indirect question. a) Presentation. - Ask Ss to give the form to change the Yes- No question in to indirect speech. b) Practice. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise in the text book, - Write the sentences on the BB. Check if necessary. b)Nhi asked Nga if it was far from Hanoi. c) Nhi asked Nga if My son was in Quang Nam province. d) Nhi asked Nga if Many people lived at My Son. e) Nhi asked Nga if many tourist visited My Son every year. f) Nhi asked Nga if she wanted to visit My son one day. c.Production. - Ask ss to report some questions ;  -Do you like English , Nga?  -Is your class ready to do the exercise Nam?  -Are you interested in taking part in sports? - Read aloud the answers before class. B. Question words + To- infinitive.. a) Presentation T write the question on the BB and ask Ss to give the form of it. - Explain the order of the sentences. Practice. - Write the sentences on the BB. c) Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets. d) Nga pointed out where to buy souvenirs. e) Nga advised Nhi how to go from My son to Hoi An. f) Nga told Nhi what to do there during the visit. c)Production. Read aloud the sentences. D.Verb + To- infinitive. a) Presentation. - Ask ss to write the words that have to infinitive: Decide, Start, try , begin + toinfinitive. b) Practice. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise in the book. - Write the answers on the BB. 1)started to Jog. 2)Might go. 3)Began to gather 4)Started to rain. 5)Tried to reach. 6)Decided to continue. 7)Couldn’t get. c)Production. - Ask Ss to read the paragraph aloud before the class. 4. Consolidation. - Ask Ss to retell the main conteny of the lesson; The passive voice. The indirect speech, Wh + To- infinitive. 5. Home work - Ss do exercise 5+6+7 ( p; 88/89); - Prepare for the revision..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span> tenses they have learnt to do exercises. -----------------------II.Vocabulary. ***-------------------------- Review vocabulary of unit 12 and 13. III.Language focus. - The passive voice. IV.Language skills. duyÖt:01/4/2 - Reading and writing. 013 V. Preparation: - Textbook. TT VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… NguyÔ Date:………… Class n Sü 8A2:.........……/25Absent: Quang……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Presentation: * Exercises. I. Turn into Passive voice : S + am/is/are + P2 + by+ O 1. The bill includes service. 2.People don’t use this road very often. 3. They don’t pay Jim very much. 4. People speak English in almost every corner of the world. 5.After class, one of the students always erases the chalk board 6. They use milk for making butter and cheese. P: 07/4/2013 7. Weeds cover the river. Period 91: Revision 8. No one believes his story. 9.John delivers the newspapers T: every morning. 10.Do they teach English here? I. Objectives: 11. Where do people speak - By the end of the lesson, Ss will English? be able to use the structures and the II. Turn into Passive voice : S + am/is/are+ being + P2 + by+ O.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span> 1.They are building a new ring-road round the city. 2. He is asking me a lot of questions. 3. Is she making big cakes for the party? 4.Are the police making inquires about the thief? 5. They are painting their house. 6. People are redecorating the office. 7. He is writing a letter. 8. She is running her own company. 9. What books are people reading this year? 10.Who are they keeping in the kitchen? III. Turn into Passive voice : S + have/has + been + P2 + by+ O 1.They have changed the date of the meeting. 2. My mother has made that cake. 3. They has prepared a dinner before we come. 4. They have provided the victims with food and clothing. 5. No one has ever treated me with such kindness. 6. Science and Technology have completely changed human life. 7. Have they changed the window of the laboratory? 8. Has Tom finished the work? 9.How long have they waited for the doctor? 10. The police have arrested three men. IV. Turn into Passive voice : S + was/were + P2 + by+ O 1.They cancelled all flights because of fog. 2.Somebody accused me of stealing the money.. 3.Nobody told me that George was ill. 4.His colleagues gave him a present when he retired. 5. Luckily for me, they didn't call my name. 6. They told the new pupil where to sit 7. A man I know told me about it. 8. Smoke filled the room 9.They didn’t ask me my name. 10. I washed the car yesterday. 11. Last year, they built a new hospital. 12. Did the teacher give some exercises? 13.Why didn't they help him? 14. How did the police find the lost man? 15. Who looked after the children for you? * Answer key I. Turn into Passive voice : S + am/is/are + P2 + by+ O 1.Service is included in the bill. 2.This road isn't used very often 3.Jim isn't paid very much 4.English is spoken in almost every corner of the world. 5.After class, the chalk board is always erased by one of the students. 6.Milk is used for making butter and cheese. 7.The river is covered with weeds 8.His story isn't believed 9.The newspapers are delivered by John every morning. 10. Is English taught here? 11. Where is English spoken ? II. Turn into Passive voice : S + am/is/are+ being + P2 + by+ O 1.A new ring-road is being built round the city..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span> 2. I am being asked a lot of questions. 3. Are big cakes being made for the party? 4. Are inquires about the thief being made by the police? 5. Their house is being painted 6. The office is being redecorated . 7. A letter is being written 8. Her own office is being run by herself. 9.What books are being read this year? 10. Who is being kept in the kitchen? III. Turn into Passive voice : S + have/has + been + P2 + by+ O 1.The date of the meeting has been changed. 2.That cake has been made by my mother. 3.A dinner has been prepared before we come. 4.The victims have been provided with food and clothing. 5.I have never treated with such kindness. 6.Human life has completely been changed by Science and Technology. 7.Has the window of the laboratory been changed ? 8.Has the work been finished by Tom? 9.How long has the doctor been waited for? 10.Three men have been arrested by the police. IV. Turn into Passive voice : S + was/were + P2 + by+ O 1.All flights were cancelled because of fog. 2.I was accused of stealing the money. 3.I wasn't told that………….. 4.He was given a present by his colleagues when he retired. 5.Luckily for me, my name wasn't called 6.The new pupil was told where to sit 7.I was told about it by a man I know. 8.The room was filled with smoke. 9.I wasn't asked my name 10.The car was washed yesterday. 11.Last year, a new hospital was built. 12.Were some exercises given by the teacher? 13.Why wasn't he helped? 14.How was the lost man found by the police? 15.By whom were the children looked after for you? 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points. 5. Homework: - Review and re-do exercises..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span> 2. Oral test: - Homework correction. 3. New lesson: A. Presentation: * Exercises.. P:07/4/2013 Period 92: Revision T: I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the structures and the tenses they have learnt to do exercises. II.Vocabulary. - Review vocabulary of unit 14. III.Language focus. - The indirect speech, Wh + Toinfinitive. IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… …. Trùc tiÕp Gi¸n tiÕp  HTÑ  HTTD  QKÑ  HTHT  will  can  must  may  has to/ have to  am/is/are going to  should/ ought to Exercise: 1. Lan said, “I’m told to be here before 7 o’clock”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 2. Thanh said , “All the students will have a meeting tonight”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 3. Phong said to his friend, “My parents are very proud of my good marks”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 4. Lien said to her brother, “You ought to clean your room today”  ______________________________. Trùc  He  Th  Th  To  No  To  To  Ye  Ne  La.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span> ______________________________ ___ 5. Her father said to her, “You can go to the movie with your friends”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 6. The students said, “We have to finish our work before going out for lunch”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 7. Lily said “ My aunt doesn’t know where I am now”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 8. Hoa said to her friend, “My father helped me do my homework last night”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 9. Susan said to Tim, “I am making a chocolate cake for your birthday party tonight”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 10. “I expect to see you next Wednesday”, Mary said to her friend.  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___. II/. Ex: a. John said to Susan, “Open the door, please”  John told Susan to open the door. b. Lan said, “Don’t write anything on the wall, Nam”  Lan asked Nam not to write anything on the wall. c. Sam said, “Would you like a cup of coffee, Jenny?”  Sam invited_____________________ ___________________________ __ Exercise: 11. My mother said to me, “Don’t stay up late watching TV.”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 12. Lam said to Minh, “ Will you buy me some apples, please?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 13. He said to me, “Can you post this letter for me?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 14. The doctor said to Mr. Robinson, “Don’t drink wine or beer.”  The doctor advised________________________ ________________________ 15. The teacher said to us, “Copy these exercises in your notebooks.”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span> 16. She said to her son, “Don’t spend much time on playing games.”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 17. Robert said to me, “Would you mind making me a glass of iced tea?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 18. Mrs. Barker said to her husband, “Would you please cook dinner for me this evening?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 19. Lan said to John, “ Would you like a cupof coffee?”  Lan offered________________________ ______________________________ _________ 20. “Can you lend me some money” Joe said to me, “ I want to buy this lovely doll”.  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ III/. Ex: a. John said, “Can you play the guitar, Susan?”  John asked Susan if she could play the guitar. b. Lan said to Peter, “ Are you English?”  Lan asked Peter whether he was English. c. Sam said, “Do you love rock music, Kate?”.  Sam ___________________________ ___________________________ _____ Exercise: 21. I asked him, “Will you take part in the program with us?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 22. He asked me, “Are you free this Sunday?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 23. My teacher said to me, “Have you ever heard about UFOs?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 24. She asked me, “Do you like playing games on the Internet?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 25. She asked her brother,” Did you find the key last night?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 26. The tourist asked me, “Is there a post office near here?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 27. The examiner asked Hoa, “Can you speak French?”  ______________________________.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span> ______________________________ ___ 28. Tuan asked Ba, “Is your sister fond of Tom and Jerry?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 29. “Will you be here for next Sunday, Scott?” said Alan.  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 30. “Does you mother go to work by bus?”, Tim asked Lily.  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ IV. Ex: a. John said, “Where are you going, Jenny?”  John asked Jenny where she was going. b. Lan said to Peter, “ Why do you collect waste paper?”  Lan asked Peter why he collected waste paper. c. Sam said, “How much does this dress cost, Kate?”  Sam ___________________________ ___________________________ _____. 32. He asked me, “What television program do you like best?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 33. My teacher said to me, “How long will you stay in England?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 34. She asked me, “Where does your father work?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 35. She asked her brother,” What’s your hobby?”  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___ 4. Consolidation: - Remind Ss the key points. 5. Homework: - Review and re-do exercises.. Ký duyÖt:08/4 013 TT. Exercise: 31. “What language can you speak” Mr. Robinson asked Hoa.  ______________________________ ______________________________ ___. NguyÔ n Sü Quang.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span> 2 Read and answer. 4. Reading. 4 2 Writing. Total P:14/4/2013 Period 93:Written test 4 T: Time allowance: 45 ms. 8S 4 MS 40%. 8S 4 MS 40%. 8. Choose the answer. Tenses. II. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: I. The aims. ………………………………… - To test students’ knowledge Date:………… Class from unit 12 to unit 14. 8A2:.........……/25Absent: - Knowledge: The passive voice, ……………………………… … the indirect speech. 2. Check up - Vocabulary: learnt vocabulary - Check the preparation of Ss. from unit to 12 unit 14. 3.Testing time: - Skills: Reading and writing. - Time allowance: 45’ A. The matric . B.Questions. I. Choose the best answers. ( 2p). Recognizin Understanding 1. Sydney is famous for g Knowledge its.............................. T a. Big Ben Clock. b. TNKQ TNKQ L Opera house. c. Statue of Liberty. 2. The children ....................football Vocabulary when it started raining. and a. played b. grammar playing c. were playing. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span> 3. My teacher ................... a new lesson at about 9:00 this morning. a. explained b. explaining. c. was explaining 4. Lan ......................her raincoat home. a. always forget b. is always forgetting c. always forgot. 5. She asked her students..................... all the homework. a. to do b. doing c. do. 6. Have you ever been to a ...................... festival ? a. bull- fight b. bullfighting c. fighting – bull. 7. They told their children.....................up the tree. a. don’t climb b. not climb c. not to climb. 8. Dalat is................... as the city of Eternal Spring. a. known b. know. c. knew. II. Rewrite the sentences ( 2p). 1.“Is the weather warm and nice ? “Thu asked Hoa.(Change into indirect speech). Thu asked Hoa if ........................................................ ........ 2.“Do you know Hue Citadel? “ Lien asked Hoa. .(Change into indirect speech). Lien asked Hoa whether ....................................... ............................... 3.They repaired this road in 2002. ( Change into passive ) This road.................................................... ................................................... 4.He said to me: “ Please ring me at 5 o’clock” .(Change into indirect speech). He asked me ..................................................... ......................................... III. Choose the correct answer. ( 2p) 1. The first prize ( give / gives / is given ) to the best team. 2.In 1964 Martin Luther King (won/ was won/ is won ) the Nobel PeacePrize. 3.Would you mind ( close / to close / closing ) the windows? 4.Liz said that she ( will send / would send / send ) me some information about her school. IV. Read and answer the questions.( 2p) Dear Mum and Dad, Well, here I am in Peru on our South America tour. We got to Lima five days ago. We had a good journey. It took three days by bus, but we saw a lot of things on the way. We didn’t do much for the first two days, as some of the girls were ill. We spent most of the time on the beach. On Wednesday we came up to the mountains and while we were doing some sightseeing it rained heavily so we could not take alot of photos. Yesterday, we went to the old Inca City of Machu Picchu. It was fantastic.Hope you are well. Love, Matt. 1.When did Matt arrive in LimaPeru ? 2. How did he get there? 3. Did they do much for the first two days ? 4. What were they doing when it rained ? *Answer keys.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span> I. Choose the best answers. ( 2p). 1.Sydney is famous for its.............................. a. Big Ben Clock. b. Opera house. c. Statue of Liberty. 2.The children ....................football when it started raining. a. played b. playing c. were playing. 3.My teacher ................... a new lesson at about 9:00 this morning. a. explained b. explaining. c. was explaining 4.Lan ......................her raincoat home. a. always forget b. is always forgetting c. always forgot. 5.She asked her students..................... all the homework. a. to do b. doing c. do. 6. Have you ever been to a ...................... festival ? a. bull- fight b. bullfighting c. fighting – bull. 7. They told their children.....................up the tree. a. don’t climb b. not climb c. not to climb. 8. Dalat is................... as the city of Eternal Spring. a. known b. know. c. knew. II. Rewrite the sentences ( 2p). 1.“Is the weather warm and nice ? “Thu asked Hoa.(Change into indirect speech). . -Thu asked Hoa if the weather was warm and nice. 2.“Do you know Hue Citadel? “ Lien asked Hoa. .(Change into indirect speech). -Lien asked Hoa whether she knew Hue Citadel 3.They repaired this road in 2002. ( Change into passive ) -This road was repaired in 2002 4.He said to me: “ Please ring me at 5 o’clock” .(Change into indirect speech). - He asked me ring him at 5 o’clock. III. Choose the correct answer. ( 2p) 2. The first prize ( give / gives / is given ) to the best team. 3. In 1964 Martin Luther King (won/ was won/ is won ) the Nobel Peace Prize. 4. Would you mind ( close / to close / closing ) the windows? 5. Liz said that she ( will send / would send / send ) me some information about her school. IV. Read and answer the questions.( 2p) 1.He arrived in Lima- Peru five days ago. 2. He got there by bus . 3.No,they didn’t . 4.They were doing some sightseeing . 4. Consolidation: - Collect all testing papers. 5. Homework: - Prepare the next lesson. -----------------------***-------------------------P:14/4/2013 T: Unit 15:Computers. Period 94: Lesson 1: Getting started & Listen and read. I. Objectives :.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span> -After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic: Computers. -To drill Ss the new words and structure ; printer , connect, under guarantee. -To drill Ss speaking and listening skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III.Language focus. - The tenses. IV.Language skills. - Listening and reading. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test: Ask Ss to change the direct sentence into indirect speech. 3.New lesson: A. Getting started. -T gives some guided sentences and ask Ss to guess the topic of the lesson. + It is a morden machine. + We use it to type letter, send email and play games. + It begins with letter C. -Ask Ss to work in groups to make a list of the benefits of computers in daily life. + Save time. + Help us learn more knowledge. + It can keep information long and safely. + Help us relax by playing games, and listen to music.. ............................................. .. B.Presentation. - Introduce the lesson and give the meaning of new words: - printer: m¸y in. - connect:kÕt nèi - socket: æ c¾m - manual: s¸ch híng dÉn sö dông. - Be under guarantee:Trong t/g b¶o hµnh - Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus after teacher . C. Practice. - Play the tape and ask Ss to listen to the tape. -Ask ss to listen to the tape and then practice the dialogue. -Work in pairs to practice the dialogue. - Ask ss to listen to the introduction about the “ fact” and “ opinion “ - Ss work in pairs to read the dialogue and decide which sentence is “the fact, or opinion” - Share the answers to their partners. - Give the correct answers. - Check if necessary. -Ask ss to read the dialogue in pairs. C. Production. 4.Consolidation: - Ask ss to retell the main content of the lesson : The Computer. 5.Home work: - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and do the exercise 1( p90) in the work book. -----------------------***--------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span> 1. Organization: Date:………… Class duyÖt:15/4/2 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: 013 ………………………………… Date:………… Class TT 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test: Ask Ss to do exercise 1 ( p 90). 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. -Ask ss work in pairs to list the NguyÔbenifit of using the computers. n Sü -Read the sentences aloud. Quang + Save time. + Help us relax. + Learn more about the knowledge. + Store information carefully and logically. .......................................... ............. B. Presentation: * Pre- speaking. - Ask Ss to look at the clear paper P:21/4/2013 and listen to the introduction of the Unit 15: Computers lesson. T: Period - Explain the way to express and 95: Lesson 2 :Speak & Listen respond to the opinions. - Ss write down . Ask ss work in I. Objectives : pairs to list the benifit of using the -After the lesson Ss will be able to computers. talk about the computer and learn - Read the sentences aloud. how to and express to opinions - Ask ss to play the matching.( work about talking computer. in pairs). -To drill Ss speaking skills. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to use the II.Vocabulary. words in the table to practice - Explain some new words. -Work in pairs to play the matching. III.Language focus. Driving/ learning to - The tense drive a car. IV.Language skills. Comic books/ reading - Speaking and listening comic books. V. Preparation: Walking/ driving in - Textbook. the rain. VI. Teaching procedure:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span> Foreign food/ eating foreign food. - Provide the new words: Challenging: ®Çy thö th¸ch. - Time- consuming: tèn thêi gian. * While – speaking. -Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice speaking. -give the guided speaking. a) A: I think driving a car can be dangerous. B: I agree, but there won't be a problem if you are careful. A: I think learning to drive a car is challenging. B: You are right, It is dificult to get used to driving in the streets especially at rush hours. b) A: I don't like reading comic books. They are so boring. B: Neither do I. I prefer reading fairy tales. A: Reading comic book is entertaining. B: Yes, But on the other hand It is time- consuming. - Call some pairs to practice speaking. * Post- speaking. - Ask Ss to look at the exercise 2 in the text book and listen to the explaination of the order. -Write the meaning of new words: - Monitor: mµn h×nh. - Screen: mµn h×nh - Mouse: con chuét m¸y tÝnh - Adjust the knob: ®iÒu chØng nót vÆn. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice making dialogue. - Some pairs speak aloud before the class.. A: I'm having a problems with my monitor. B: What is wrong ? A: The screen is too dark. I think it is broken. B: I don't think so, Let me see. You should adjust the knob. A: Oh , thank you. I didn't know that. * Pre-listening. -Ask ss to listen to the introduction about the lesson and then ask them to work in pairs to discuss which materials we use to make paper.  What can we use to make paper?  How is paper made ? - Ask Ss to write the new words and their meaning. Pulp vat: chum bét giÊy. Roll: trôc l¨n, con l¨n Papermaking machine: m¸y lµm giÊy -Ask Ss to read the new words and write the meaning of new words. -Ask Ss to listen to the tape to do the exercise 1 ( p150). * While - listening. -Play the tape twice and then complete the sentences in the text book. -Work in pairs to share the answers to the partners. -Read the answers aloud. a) Paper making is a simple process. a) The procedure is almost the same as it was two hundred years ago. b) The pulp vat is on the left of the machine. c) The papermaking machine has alot of rollers. -Check the answers ..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span> -Read again the sentences. * Post- listening. -Ask Ss to liten to the tape again and then work in pairs to arrange the sentences into correct order. -Share the answers to their partners. -Write the answers on the BB. c) Paper pulp was placed in the vat. d) Paper pulp was mixed with water. a) The water was drained. e) The pulp fibers were poured out. g) The pulp was conveyed under the rollers. f) The fibers were smoothed and pressed dry. b) The paper was put on a roll. - Read the answers aloud - Check if necessary. 4.Consolidation - Ask ss to retell again the processing of making paper. 5. Home work -Ask Ss to do the exercise in the work book. - Do exercise 2 ( p90). -----------------------***--------------------------. P:21/4/2013 Unit 15: Computers T: Period 96 :Lesson 3: Read. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to know the useful of using computers at schools. -To drill Ss the words: send massage, receive information, fresh man, computer bulletin board......... -To drill Ss reading skill. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III.Language focus. - The tense IV.Language skills. - Reading V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test: Ask Ss to do exercise 3 ( p 91). 3.New lesson: A. Warm up. -Ask Ss to dicuss again the steps to get drink from amachine and speak aloud in front of the class.( Work in pairs)  find the machine.  ask yourself if you have correct change.  Ask yourself what drink you want to drink.  Insert coins and press the button.  Take the drink appearred. - Give the remark to students ‘ speech. B. Presentation: * Pre-reading..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span> -Introduce the lesson by giving the advantages of having computers. -Give the meaning of new words. Store information:lu tr÷ th«ng tin. Send massage: göi tin nh¾n receive information: nhËn th«ng tin telephone lines: đờng dây điện tho¹i. Access: truy cËp.. Freshmen: sinh viªn n¨m thø nhÊt College campus: khu«n viªn trêng đại học Computer bulletin board: bản tin ®iÖn tö. -Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus. * While - reading. - Ask Ss to scan the reading and then answers the two questions: 1)What is the main idea of the passage? a.universities. b.computers. c. students 2. Who would be interested in the reading ? a. students b. doctors c. singers. - Ask Ss to read again the reading and then decide whether the statements in your book are true ( T ) or false ( F ). -T gives the correct answers -Ask Ss to work in pairs to read the reading again and answer the questions: a) It doesn't have a library. All the information normally found in a library now stored in the university's computers. b) All the information is available through the computer. c) A computer and a telephone line. d) With a bulletin board on the internet, a great number of people. can get access to the bulletin and exchange information quickly. e) More and more people complete their college degree through Distance education programs online -Ask Ss to read the reading aloud in front of the rest. * Post - reading. - Ask Ss to retell again the useful of using computers. 4. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to retell the main content of the lesson: The useful of using computers at school. 5. Home work: - Read the reading and do exercise 4 ( p92) in the work book. - Prepare new lesson. Write -----------------------***--------------------------. P:21/4/2013 Unit 15: Computers T: Period 97: Lesson 4: Write I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to know how to use the printer -To drill Ss the words: paper, icon, power button, out put path -To drill Ss writing skill. ( writing instruction).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span> II.Vocabulary. - Explain some new words. III.Language focus. - The tense IV.Language skills. - Writing V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/25Absent: ……………………………… … 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do exercise 4 ( p 92). 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. -Ask ss to play the matching: A. B. a. paper input tray 1. GiÊy. b. monitor screen 2. đờng/ lối ra. c. power button 3. Ký hiÖu. d. icon 4. Nót më ®iÖn. e. output path 5. Khay ®a giÊy vµo. f. paper 6. Mµn h×nh.. B. Presentation: * Pre- writing. - Ask Ss to use the items with correct picture in the text book. - Call Ss to read the words aloud. d) ........3........paper input tray.. b)..........1.......monitor screen. c)...........6...... power button. d)...........2........icon. e)......... 4.........output path. f) .........5........paper. -Read the word in chorus. * While - writing. - Ask ss to use the words given and the pictures in the book to write the instruction of using the printer. - Ask ss to share the answer to the partners. - Ss write the sentences on the BB. - Call some pairs to show their writings to check. a. Plug in the printer and turn on the power. b. Remove the old paper and load the new paper in the paper input tray. c. Wait for the power button to flash. d. Have the pages appear on the computer screen. e. Click the printer icon on the screen and wait for a few seconds. f. The printed paper will get out from the output path in a minute - Check the writing and give the remark. - Ask Ss to read the instruction again. * Post- writing. -Ask ss to do the exercise : -Match the name with the pictures given to show the meaning of them. The names: Headphone, mouse, printer, screen, plug, loudspeakers, socket, computer, keyboard.disk/ disc. 4. Consolidation:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span> - Ask ss to retell the main content of the lesson.( Write the instruction to use ) 5.Home work: - Ask ss to do the exercise in the work book. - Prepare new lesson.. III.Language focus. - The tense IV.Language skills. - Reading and listening V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: -----------------------Date:………… Class ***-------------------------8A1:.........…/25 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/23Absent: duyÖt:22/4/2 ……………………………… … 013 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to retell how to use the TT printer.? 3.New lesson: A.Warm up. -Ask Ss to do the rearrange sentences into meaningful passage to know how to get money from the machine. NguyÔ1. Choose the amount of money n Sü you want to withdraw. Quang2. Enter the PIN ( Personal Identification Number) 3. Insert the card into the machine. 4. Get money and the receipt. -Ask ss to work in pairs to do. P:08/4/2012 -Give the correct answers. Unit 15: Computers B.Presentation: T: Period 98: * The present perfect tense. Lesson 5: Language focus 1.Presentation. -Ask ss to give the form of the I. Objectives : present perfect tense used with -After the lesson Ss will be able to already and Yet. revise the present perfect tense and -Work in pairs to give the form and compare with the simple past tense the uses. -Ask Ss to do the exercise in the text book. S + Have/ Has + PP + O . -To drill Ss writing and speaking The uses: skills. -Express the action that happened in II.Vocabulary. the past and relate to the - Explain some new words. present.Used with “yet” ..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(201)</span> Ex: Have you finished your homework yet? -Express the action that happened in the past and already finished. Ex: I have already finished the homework yet. -Ask them to compare with the simple past tense. 2.Practice. -Ask ss to work in pairs to do the exercise 1 ( p144). -Share the answers to the partners. -Give the correct asnwers. Ex: 1 Ba: yes, I have already finished it, Mom. Ba: I’m sorry, Mom. I haven’t cleaned and tidied it yet. Ba: don’t worry , Mom. I have already turned it off. Ba: I have already called and told her to have lunch with us. - Ask Ss to do exercise 2 ( p144145). - Work in pairs to practice asking and answering about the flight. - Ask ss to do this axercise orally. - Call some pairs to practice before the class. - Ask Ss to do the exercise 3 ( p146). - T explains the examples: + I have been to Sapa.( Finished action) + I have gone to SaPa. ( Incompleted action) -Work in pairs to give the correct answers: Ex3: c. She has finished her homework. ( complted) d. He has worked with the computer since early morning.( Incomplete ) e.( Completed) f.( completed ) g.( Incomplete).. 3. Production. -Ask ss to give the whole uderstanding about the present perfect tense. * Pressent perfect and the simple past tense. -Ask Ss to give the differences between the uses of the two tenses. -Ask ss to work in pairs to do the exercise 4 ( p146). -Call some pairs to write on the BB. 1. have you seen?/ did you see? /saw. 2. haven't had. 6.had. 3. Have been. 7. fell 4. Have you heard? 8. Broke. 5. Happened. 9. Has arrived?/has/did arrive / arrived. 4. Consolidation: -Ask ss to give the main content of the lesson. 5. Homework: -Prepare for the new lesson. Pre:08/4/2012 Period 99: test CORRECTION T: I.Objectives: - During the lesson Ss will be able to realizetheir weakness and how to improve their skills. II.Vocabulary. - Places. III.Language focus..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(202)</span> - Would you mind if I, Would you mind, be used to and passive voice. IV.Language skills. - Reading and writing. V. Preparation: - Textbook. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 8A1:.........…/25 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 8A2:.........……/23Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - During the lesson. 3. Testing correction: * Questions. I. Choose the best answers. ( 2p). 6. Sydney is famous for its.............................. b. Big Ben Clock. b. Opera house. c. Statue of Liberty. 7. The children ....................football when it started raining. a. played b. playing c. were playing. 8. My teacher ................... a new lesson at about 9:00 this morning. a. explained b. explaining. c. was explaining 9. Lan ......................her raincoat home. a. always forget b. is always forgetting c. always forgot. 10.She asked her students..................... all the homework. a. to do b. doing c. do. 6. Have you ever been to a ...................... festival ?. a. bull- fight b. bullfighting c. fighting – bull. 7. They told their children.....................up the tree. a. don’t climb b. not climb c. not to climb. 8. Dalat is................... as the city of Eternal Spring. a. known b. know. c. knew. II. Rewrite the sentences ( 2p). 1.“Is the weather warm and nice ? “Thu asked Hoa.(Change into indirect speech). Thu asked Hoa if ........................................................ ........ 1. “Do you know Hue Citadel? “ Lien asked Hoa. .(Change into indirect speech). Lien asked Hoa whether ....................................... ............................... 2. They repaired this road in 2002. ( Change into passive ) This road.................................................... .................................................. 3. He said to me: “ Please ring me at 5 o’clock” .(Change into indirect speech). He asked me ..................................................... ......................................... III. Choose the correct answer. ( 2p) 6. The first prize ( give / gives / is given ) to the best team. 2.In 1964 Martin Luther King (won/ was won/ is won ) the Nobel PeacePrize. 3.Would you mind ( close / to close / closing ) the windows? 4.Liz said that she ( will send / would send / send ) me some information about her school..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(203)</span> IV. Read and answer the questions.( 2p)Dear Mum and Dad, Well, here I am in Peru on our South America tour. We got to Lima five days ago. We had a good journey. It took three days by bus, but we saw a lot of things on the way. We didn’t do much for the first two days, as some of the girls were ill. We spent most of the time on the beach. On Wednesday we came up to the mountains and while we were doing some sightseeing it rained heavily so we could not take alot of photos. Yesterday, we went to the old Inca City of Machu Picchu. It was fantastic.Hope you are well. Love, Matt. 1.When did Matt arrive in LimaPeru ? 2. How did he get there? 3. Did they do much for the first two days ? 4. What were they doing when it rained ? III. Answer keys and points I. Choose the best answers. ( 2p). 1.Sydney is famous for its.............................. b. Big Ben Clock. b. Opera house. c. Statue of Liberty. 2.The children ....................football when it started raining. a. played b. playing c. were playing. 3.My teacher ................... a new lesson at about 9:00 this morning. a. explained b. explaining. c. was explaining 4.Lan ......................her raincoat home.. a. always forget b. is always forgetting c. always forgot. 5.She asked her students..................... all the homework. a. to do b. doing c. do. 6. Have you ever been to a ...................... festival ? a. bull- fight b. bullfighting c. fighting – bull. 7. They told their children.....................up the tree. a. don’t climb b. not climb c. not to climb. 8. Dalat is................... as the city of Eternal Spring. a. known b. know. c. knew. II. Rewrite the sentences ( 2p). 1.“Is the weather warm and nice ? “Thu asked Hoa.(Change into indirect speech). . -Thu asked Hoa if the weather was warm and nice 2.“Do you know Hue Citadel? “ Lien asked Hoa. .(Change into indirect speech). -Lien asked Hoa whether she knew Hue Citadel 3.They repaired this road in 2002. ( Change into passive ) -This road was repaired in 2002 4.He said to me: “ Please ring me at 5 o’clock” .(Change into indirect speech). - He asked me ring him at 5 o’clock. III. Choose the correct answer. ( 2p) 7. The first prize ( give / gives / is given ) to the best team..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(204)</span> 8. In 1964 Martin Luther King (won/ was won/ is won ) the Nobel Peace Prize. 9. Would you mind ( close / to close / closing ) the windows? 10.Liz said that she ( will send / would send / send ) me some information about her school. IV. Read and answer the questions.( 2p) 1.He arrived in Lima- Peru five days ago. 2. He got there by bus . 3.No,they didn’t . 4.They were doing some sightseeing . 4. Consolidation - Remind Ss some common mistakes they have 5. Home work. -Note the way to have better written test. - Prepare new lesson. -----------------------***--------------------------. P:15/4/2012 Period 100: revision T:. I.Ojectives. - After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammartical structures and the vocabulary that they learnt in grade 7 . - To drill Ss reading, writing, and listening skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some words words. III.Language focus. - The simple present tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading and listening. V. Preparation: - Tape,cassette,text book and work sheet. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 7A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 7A2:.........……/28Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to make sentences with the simple past tense? 3. Presentation: A. Warm up. - Ask Ss to give the main grammar point that they learnt in grade 7. B. Presentation:. 1.The simple future. S + will / shall + V + O. 2.The simple past. S + V-ed + O. 3. The structure with : either / neither / so / too. 4. Modal verbs: Can / must/ ought to / should + V-infi... 5. Adjective and adverb. - Good, well , quick, quickly.......... 6. The express like and dislike. To prefer/like+ V- ing..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(205)</span> To – V. 7.Why- because. 8. The structure with : get used to + V-ing. C. Practice. -Ask ss to work in pairs to do the exercises. Ex1: Correct the mistake. . Hoa prefers reading books to play video games. A B C D 2. After each lesson we often have a ten – minutes rest. A B C D 3. Million of foreign visitors come to Vietnam every year. A B C D 4. Would you like going to the movies with us tonight? A B C D 5. My sister likes badminton but she doesn't play it very good. A B C D Ex 2:Rewrite the following sentences: 1. Listening to music at home is more interesting than going to the concert. -> I prefer........................................... 2. You shouldn’t eat too much candies. -> You ‘d.......................................... 3. My mother cooks well. -> My mother is a............................... 4.We didn’t enjoy the trip because of the heavy rain. -> The heavy rain prevented.................... 4. Consolidation:. - Ask ss to retell the structures that they learnt in grade 7. 5. Home work: - Revise the structures that they learnt in grade 7. - Get ready for the written test..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(206)</span> P:15/4/2012 Period 102: revision T: I. Ojectives. - After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammartical structures and the vocabulary that they learnt in grade 7 . - To drill Ss reading, writing, and listening skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some words words. III.Language focus. - The tenses. IV.Language skills. - Reading and listening. V. Preparation: - Tape,cassette,text book ,work sheet. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 7A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 7A2:.........……/28Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to make sentences with the simple past tense? 3. Presentation: A.Warm up. - Ask Ss to give the main grammar point that they learnt in grade 7. B.Presentation:. I.VOCABULARY,PRONUNCIAT ION AND GRAMMAR: (5ms) A . Choose the word which is pronounced differently from the others (1m): 1. a) meet b) street c) volunteer d) free. 2. a) lunch b) couch c) change d) chemistry 3. a) teenager b) get c) guitar d) game 4. a) scout b) group c) couch d) house B. Choose the best answer. (2 ms) 1. They prefer reading......................watching TV. a. than b. more than c. to 2.This river is very....................for the swimmers. a. danger b. dangerously. c. dangerous. 3. I like swimming. ...................................... a. so do I b. Yes , I do c. I do, too. 4. He likes ................sports in his free time. a. watch b. to watch c. watching. 5. Some teenagers enjoy........................ a. roller- skate b. rollerskating c. roller- skates. 6. She ought to..................her homework before going to bed. a. finishes. B. finish c. finishing. 7. .................swimming ? - That ‘s OK. a. How about b. Let’s c. Shall we. 8. What would you like ................. ? - Pop music. a. to watch. B. to play c. to listen to. C. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. (2 ms) 1.Ba went to the doctor because he ( be ) ..........................sick..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(207)</span> 2.She (not watch )............................................... .TV every night. 3. I’d like ( tell ).................................... you something about myself. 4. Children should ( spend)....................a small part of their free time playing videogames. II. Reading (2 ms) Read and answer the questions: Nowadays, television becomes very popular. Both old and young people enjoy watching it very much. TV programs attract millions of viewers all over the world. In addition to the news, television stations also broadcast many interesting programs such as sports, music, cartoons , movies, contests,........ At present, people can enjoy a live program on TV. In our country, we often watch live TV programs of important events and international football matches. Questions: 1. Who enjoy watching television? 2. What do television stations broadcast ? 3. Can people enjoy a live program on TV ? 4. What do we often watch in our country ?. Quick. ......................... Fast. ......................... Sudden. ......................... ......................... Free Skillful Hard Early. ........................ ........................ .......................... Careless ......................... B. Rewrite these sentences(2 ms) Shall we go to the cinema? => Let’s …………………………………… …….. She sings very beautifully => She is …………………………………… …….. Don’t forget to lock the door before going to bed. => Remember …………………………………… … Learning English well is not easy => It is …………………………………....... ........... * KEYS AND MARKS. III. Writing ( 3 ms) A. Write the adverbs from the adjectives below. (1 m) Adjectives Adverbs Adjectives Adverbs. Good. ......................... Slow. ......................... I.VOCABULARY,PRONUNCIAT ION AND GRAMMAR: (5ms) A. Choose the word which is pronounced differently from the others. (1m) 1.c (0.25m) 2.d (0.25m) 3.a (0.25m) 4.b (0.25m).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(208)</span> B. Choose the best answer. (2 ms) 1.c (0.25m) 5.b (0.25m) 2.c (0.25m) 6.b (0.25m) 3.a (0.25m) 7.a (0.25m) 4.c (0.25m) 8.c (0.25m) C. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. (2ms) 1.was (0.25m) 2.doesn’t watch (0.25m) 3.to tell (0.25m) 4.spend (0.25m) II. Reading (2ms) Answer the questions: 1. Both old and young people enjoy watching television. (0.5m) 2. Television stations broadcast many interesting programs such as sports, music, cartoons , movies, contests. (0.5m) 3. Yes, they can. (0.5m) 4. In our country, we often watch live TV programs of important events and international football matches. (0.5m) III. Writing (3 ms) A. Write the adverbs from the adjectives below. (1m) Adjectives Adverbs Adjectives Adverbs. good well (0.1m) slow slowly (0.1m) quick quickly (0.1m) fast fast (0.1m) free freely (0.1m) sudden suddenly (0.1m). skillful skillfully (0.1m) hard hard (0.1m) early early (0.1m) careless carelessly (0.1m) B. Rewrite these sentences(2 ms) 1.Let’s go to the cinema (0.5m) 2.She is a beautiful singer. (0.5m) 3.Remember to lock the door before going to bed. (0.5m) 4.It is not easy to learn English well. (0.5m) 4. Consolidation: Ask ss to retell the structures that they learnt in grade 7. 5. Home work: -Revise the structures that they learnt in grade 7. - Get ready for the written test..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(209)</span> P:15/4/2012 Period 103: revision T: I. Ojectives. - After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammartical structures and the vocabulary that they learnt in grade 7 . - To drill Ss reading, writing, and listening skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some words words. III.Language focus. - The simple present tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading and listening. V. Preparation: - Tape,cassette,text book ,work sheet. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 7A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 7A2:.........……/28Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to make sentences with the simple past tense? 3. Presentation: A.Warm up. - Ask Ss to give the main grammar point that they learnt in grade 7. B.Presentation:. I. Choose the best answer. ( Chän đáp án đúng nhất ).2p 1. He ......................come here last night.. a. doesn’t b. won’t c. didn’t. 2. ....................a nice dress ! a.What b. Where c .How. 3. We enjoy.................. around the world. a. travel b. traveling c. to travel. 5. You should ....................your hands before meals. a. to wash b.wash c. washing. 6. How ..................is Nga ? a. heavy b. weight c. high. 7.She doesn’t like pork , and ........................does her uncle. a. either b. so c. neither. 8.This river is very...................... for the swimmers. a. dangerous b. danger c. dangerously. II. Underline the correct form of the verbs to complete the following sentences ( gạch chân động từ đúng để hoàn thành câu) 2p. 1. Nam went to the doctor because he ( is / was ) sick. 2. She ( doesn't watch / didn't watch ) television everynight. 3. The children must ( be/ to be) back by six o’clock 4.Many people prefer ( flying / to fly ) to going by sea. III. Arrange the words into meaningful sentences( H·y s¾p xÕp nh÷ng tõ sau thµnh c©u cã nghÜa ) 2p 1. Like / dinner / house / would / have / tonight / you / at / to/ my ? 2. Watching / prefers / to / he / books / TV / reading..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(210)</span> 3. unhealthy / Sugar / not / an / is / food. 4. eat/ fruit / should / and / we/ vegetables/. IV.Use the words given to fill in the blanks. ( Sö dông tõ cho tríc ®iÒn vµo chç trèng )2p . About, breathing, invention, thanks, surface.. Most of the world’s ...... ( 1)...... is water. We may know the land very well, but we know very little .....( 2)....the ocean. Until recently, man could not stay underwater for long. But now, with speacial ( 3).........equipment, a diver can stay longer, After the (4)....of this equipment, man could swim freely underwater and scuba-diving became a popular sport. We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to this invention. 4. Consolidation: - Collect all testing papers. - Give some remarks about Ss' work. 5. Homework: DuyÖt : 16/4/2012 - Review all key points. TT - Practice further.. P:15/4/2012 Period 101: revision T: I.Ojectives. - After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammartical structures and the vocabulary that they learnt in grade 7 . - To drill Ss reading, writing, and listening skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some words words. III.Language focus. - The simple present tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading and listening. V. Preparation: guyÔn- Tape,cassette,text book ,work sheet. Sü QuangVI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 7A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 7A2:.........……/28Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(211)</span> - Ask Ss to make sentences with the simple past tense? 3. Presentation: D. Warm up. - Ask Ss to give the main grammar point that they learnt in grade 7. E. Presentation:. 1.The simple future. S + will / shall + V + O. 2.The simple past. S + V-ed + O. 3. The structure with : either / neither / so / too. 4. Modal verbs: Can / must/ ought to / should + V-infi... 5. Adjective and adverb. - Good, well , quick, quickly.......... 6. The express like and dislike. To prefer/like+ V- ing. To – V. 7.Why- because. 8. The structure with : get used to + V-ing. F. Practice. -Ask ss to work in pairs to do the exercises. Ex1: Correct the mistake. . Hoa prefers reading books to play video games. A B C D 2. After each lesson we often have a ten – minutes rest. A B C D 3. Million of foreign visitors come to Vietnam every year. A B C D 4. Would you like going to the movies with us tonight? A B C D 5. My sister likes badminton but she doesn't play it very good.. A. B. C D Ex 2:Rewrite the following sentences: 1. Listening to music at home is more interesting than going to the concert.  I prefer........................................... 2. You shouldn’t eat too much candies.  You ‘d.......................................... 3. My mother cooks well.  My mother is a............................... 4.We didn’t enjoy the trip because of the heavy rain.  The heavy rain prevented.................... 4. Consolidation: Ask ss to retell the structures that they learnt in grade 7. 5. Home work: -Revise the structures that they learnt in grade 7. - Get ready for the written test..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(212)</span> P:15/4/2012 Period 102: revision T: I.Ojectives. - After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammartical structures and the vocabulary that they learnt in grade 7 . - To drill Ss reading, writing, and listening skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some words words. III.Language focus. - The tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading and listening. V. Preparation: - Tape,cassette,text book ,work sheet. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 7A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 7A2:.........……/28Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to make sentences with the simple past tense? 3. Presentation: A.Warm up. - Ask Ss to give the main grammar point that they learnt in grade 7. B.Presentation:. I.VOCABULARY,PRONUNCIAT ION AND GRAMMAR: (5ms) A . Choose the word which is pronounced differently from the others (1m): 1. a) meet b) street c) volunteer d) free. 2. a) lunch b) couch c) change d) chemistry 3. a) teenager b) get c) guitar d) game 4. a) scout b) group c) couch d) house B. Choose the best answer. (2 ms) 1. They prefer reading......................watching TV. a. than b. more than c. to 2.This river is very....................for the swimmers. a. danger b. dangerously. c. dangerous. 3. I like swimming. ...................................... a. so do I b. Yes , I do c. I do, too. 4. He likes ................sports in his free time. a. watch b. to watch c. watching. 5. Some teenagers enjoy........................ a. roller- skate b. rollerskating c. roller- skates. 6. She ought to..................her homework before going to bed. a. finishes. B. finish c. finishing. 7. .................swimming ? - That ‘s OK. a. How about b. Let’s c. Shall we. 8. What would you like ................. ? - Pop music. a. to watch. B. to play c. to listen to. C. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. (2 ms) 1.Ba went to the doctor because he ( be ) ..........................sick..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(213)</span> 2.She (not watch )............................................... .TV every night. 3. I’d like ( tell ).................................... you something about myself. 4. Children should ( spend)....................a small part of their free time playing videogames. II. Reading (2 ms) Read and answer the questions: Nowadays, television becomes very popular. Both old and young people enjoy watching it very much. TV programs attract millions of viewers all over the world. In addition to the news, television stations also broadcast many interesting programs such as sports, music, cartoons , movies, contests,........ At present, people can enjoy a live program on TV. In our country, we often watch live TV programs of important events and international football matches. Questions: 1. Who enjoy watching television? 2. What do television stations broadcast ? 3. Can people enjoy a live program on TV ? 4. What do we often watch in our country ? III. Writing ( 3 ms) A. Write the adverbs from the adjectives below. (1 m) Adjectives Adverbs Adjectives Adverbs. Good. ......................... Slow. ......................... Quick. ......................... Fast. ......................... Sudden. ......................... ......................... Free Skillful Hard Early. ........................ ........................ .......................... Careless ......................... B. Rewrite these sentences(2 ms) Shall we go to the cinema? => Let’s …………………………………… …….. She sings very beautifully => She is …………………………………… …….. Don’t forget to lock the door before going to bed. => Remember …………………………………… … Learning English well is not easy => It is …………………………………....... ........... * KEYS AND MARKS I.VOCABULARY,PRONUNCIAT ION AND GRAMMAR: (5ms) A. Choose the word which is pronounced differently from the others. (1m) 1.c (0.25m) 2.d (0.25m) 3.a (0.25m) 4.b (0.25m).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(214)</span> B. Choose the best answer. (2 ms) 1.c (0.25m) 5.b (0.25m) 2.c (0.25m) 6.b (0.25m) 3.a (0.25m) 7.a (0.25m) 4.c (0.25m) 8.c (0.25m) C. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. (2ms) 1.was (0.25m) 2.doesn’t watch (0.25m) 3.to tell (0.25m) 4.spend (0.25m) II. Reading (2ms) Answer the questions: 1. Both old and young people enjoy watching television. (0.5m) 2. Television stations broadcast many interesting programs such as sports, music, cartoons , movies, contests. (0.5m). skillful skillfully (0.1m) hard hard (0.1m) early early (0.1m) careless carelessly (0.1m) B. Rewrite these sentences(2 ms) 1.Let’s go to the cinema (0.5m) 2.She is a beautiful singer. (0.5m) 3.Remember to lock the door before going to bed. (0.5m) 4.It is not easy to learn English well. (0.5m) 4. Consolidation: Ask ss to retell the structures that they learnt in grade 7. 5. Home work: -Revise the structures that they learnt in grade 7. - Get ready for the written test.. 3. Yes, they can. (0.5m) 4. In our country, we often watch live TV programs of important events and international football matches. (0.5m). P:15/4/2012. III. Writing (3 ms) A. Write the adverbs from the adjectives below. (1m) Adjectives Adverbs Adjectives Adverbs. good well (0.1m) slow slowly (0.1m) quick quickly (0.1m) fast fast (0.1m) free freely (0.1m) sudden suddenly (0.1m). I.Ojectives. - After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammartical structures and the vocabulary that they learnt in grade 7 . - To drill Ss reading, writing, and listening skills. II.Vocabulary. - Explain some words words. III.Language focus. - The simple present tense. IV.Language skills. - Reading and listening. V. Preparation:. Period 103: revision T:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(215)</span> - Tape,cassette,text book ,work sheet. VI. Teaching procedure: 1. Organization: Date:………… Class 7A1:.........…/27 Absent: ………………………………… Date:………… Class 7A2:.........……/28Absent: ……………………………… … 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to make sentences with the simple past tense? 3. Presentation: A.Warm up. - Ask Ss to give the main grammar point that they learnt in grade 7. B.Presentation:. I. Choose the best answer. ( Chän đáp án đúng nhất ).2p 1. He ......................come here last night. a. doesn’t b. won’t c. didn’t. 2. ....................a nice dress ! a.What b. Where c .How. 3. We enjoy.................. around the world. a. travel b. traveling c. to travel. 5. You should ....................your hands before meals. a. to wash b.wash c. washing. 6. How ..................is Nga ? a. heavy b. weight c. high. 7.She doesn’t like pork , and ........................does her uncle. a. either b. so c. neither. 8.This river is very...................... for the swimmers.. a. dangerous b. danger c. dangerously. II. Underline the correct form of the verbs to complete the following sentences ( gạch chân động từ đúng để hoàn thành câu) 2p. 1. Nam went to the doctor because he ( is / was ) sick. 2. She ( doesn't watch / didn't watch ) television everynight. 3. The children must ( be/ to be) back by six o’clock 4.Many people prefer ( flying / to fly ) to going by sea. III. Arrange the words into meaningful sentences( H·y s¾p xÕp nh÷ng tõ sau thµnh c©u cã nghÜa ) 2p 1. Like / dinner / house / would / have / tonight / you / at / to/ my ? 2. Watching / prefers / to / he / books / TV / reading. 5. unhealthy / Sugar / not / an / is / food. 6. eat/ fruit / should / and / we/ vegetables/. IV.Use the words given to fill in the blanks. ( Sö dông tõ cho tríc ®iÒn vµo chç trèng )2p . About, breathing, invention, thanks, surface.. Most of the world’s ...... ( 1)...... is water. We may know the land very well, but we know very little .....( 2)....the ocean. Until recently, man could not stay underwater for long. But now, with speacial ( 3).........equipment, a diver can stay longer, After the (4)....of this equipment, man could swim freely underwater and scuba-diving became a popular sport. We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to this invention. 4. Consolidation: - Collect all testing papers..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(216)</span> - Give some remarks about Ss' work. 5. Homework: DuyÖt : 16/4/2012 - Review all key points. TT - Practice further.. P:...................... Period 94: Unit 15: Computers. T:…………………. Lesson 3 : Listen I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to know the way to buy goods by computers. -To drill Ss the structures: Computer programer, flow chart, circle, triangles, ovals, insert, press... -To drill Ss listening skill. II.Teaching aids Tape + cassette +textbook + pictures , III. Teaching procedure. 1.Class oganization: Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………....................... Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do exercise 2 ( p 90). 3.New lesson: A. Warm up. -Ask ss to play the cross word with the key word form the word: Computer. -Work in pairs to find the word out.. - Here the following guiding sentences: 1) taking a lot of time to do. 2) The opposite meaning of “ easy” 3) Join together. 4) Keep the information. 5) Making you smile. 6) A question or difficult situation. The key word: Computer. 1) time consuming. 2) Difficult. guyÔn 3) Connect Sü Quang4) Store. 5) Amusing. 6) Problem. B. Pre- listening. -Ask Ss to look at the chart in the book and then T explains the way to complete the table. -New word: Circle: h×nh trßn. Triangles: h×nh tam gi¸c Press button: Ên nót. Oval : h×nh « van Insert coins: nhét , đua đồng xu vµo. -Ask Ss to read the new words in chorus. -Ask Ss to listen to the tape about the steps to get drink from the machine. C. While - listening. - Play the tape twice and then fill in the chart. -Work in pairs to share the answers to p Call some Ss to give the answers after listening to the tape. Start -> find a machine -> Do you have a correct change ? -> yes -> What do you want to drink ? -> Lemon soda -> Insert coins & press button -> take it..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(217)</span> - Give the answers and check. D. Post - listening. -Ask Ss to speak again the step to get the drink from the machine. E. futher practice. -Ask ss to do the exercise: Chose the word that is different from the others: a)Computer -printer- photocopier cooker b) triangles – square –question – oval. c) shape - chart – graph – diagram. d) Lemon – fruit – melon- apple. e) microphone –TV – paper- sewing machine. f) Pulp - wash – weigh – cook. g) Sugar – cocoa- taste – butter. h) Inventor- typewriter- writerarchitect. 4.Consolidation: - Ask Ss to give the main content of the lesson: The step to get drink from machine. 5. Home work: -Ask ss to do the exercise 3 ( p91). III. Teaching procedure. 1.Class oganization : Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………....................... Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to make examples using the present perfect tense with “yet” . 3.New lesson : A. Getting started. -Ask ss to work in pair to match the stages in the development of paper with the correct pictures. -Call some pairs to give the correct answers. -Explain he meaning of new words: Papyrus: c©y cãi , giÊy cãi. Wood pulp: bét gç. Papermaking: lµm giÊy Prisoner: tï nh©n.. -----------------------***--------------------------. B.Presentation. -T introduce the lesson and ask ss to write down the new words . Cacao bean: h¹t ca cao.. P:................... Period 98 :Unit 16: Inventions. T:…………….. Lesson 1: Getting started+ Listen and read.. Manufacturing process: quy tr×nh s¶n xuÊt Crush: nghiÒn.. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquaited with the inventions: The way to make paper and how to make socola. -To drill Ss speaking and reading skills. II.Teaching aids Textbook + tape and casstte.. Liquify: lµm thµnh chÊt láng Vanilla: vani.. Pour: đổ Mold: khu«n. Conveyor belt: b¨ng truyÕn t¶i..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(218)</span> -Read the new words in chorus aloud before the class. C. Practice. -Ask ss to look at the dialogue and then listen to the introduction about the dialogue. Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice reading the dialogue. -Ask ss to work in pairs to do the matching . -Ask Ss to share the answers to the partners. -Call Ss to give the correct answers. The answers: a).The beans are cleaned before being cooked. b)Mr Robert thought Tim and Sam were ging to touch the button. c) After cooking, the cacao beans smell like chocolate. d) Sugar is one of the ingredients in chocolate. e) Mrs Allen warned Sam to leave some chocolate for others. e) A sample of chocolate is given after visitors have toured the factory. -Check if necessary. D. Production. -Ask Ss to work in pairs to read the dialogue aloud before the class. - Ask Ss to summarize the chocolate- manufacturing process. -Cal some pairs to report in front of the class. First, The beans are washed, weighed and cooked. Then, the shells are removed. Next, cacao butter, sugar, vanilla and milk are added. The mixture is ground, rolled, and poured into the molds.. -Ask Ss to give the remark and the way to report the process to make some products: We often use: First.Second, Next, then, finally. 4. Consolidation : -Ask ss to retell the process to make paper and chocolate. 5.Homework : -Ask ss to do the exercise 1 in the text book.(p96) -----------------------***-------------------------P:….................. Period 99 : Unit 16: Inventions. T:……………. Lesson 2: Speak. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to get acquainted with the inventions: fascimile, microphone, color TV, laser...................... -To drill Ss speaking skill. II.Teaching aids Textbook . III. Teaching procedure. 1.Class oganization: Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………....................... Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do the exercise 1 in the work book. 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. -Ask ss to give the process of making chocolate. -Work in pairs to speak aloud before the class..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(219)</span> First, The beans are washed, weighed and cooked. Then, the shells are removed. Next, cacao butter, sugar, vanilla and milk are added. The mixture is ground, rolled, and poured into the molds. B. Presentation * Pre- speaking. - ask to look at the speaking and then listen to teacher to prepare for the speaking. - Explain the meaning of new words: Fascimile: m¸y fax. Reinforced concrete: bª t«ng cèt thÐp Microphone: mØ cr« X-ray: m¸y chôp x- quang. Loudspeaker: loa phãng thanh Helicopter: m¸y bay trùc th¨ng Laser: kü thuËt la de. Printing press: m¸y in. Optical fiber: sîi quang. -Read the new words aloud before the class. * While - speaking. -Ask ss to work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions to fill in the table the inventions, names, and the nationalities................  When was laser invented?  What was invented by D.E Hughes ?  What was his nationality? -Work in pairs to practice. -Call some pairs to practice before the class. A: Who was microphone invented by ?. B: It was invented by D.E Hughes. A: What was his nationality ? B: He was an American. A: When was the microphone invented? B: It was invented in 1878. -Give the correct answers: * Post - speaking. -ask ss to work in pairs to play the game. One read the inventions. Others read the inventors. 4. Consolidation: -Ask ss to retell the inventions and the inventors. 5.Home work : -Ask ss to do the exercise 2 in the work book. -----------------------***-------------------------P: …..................... Period 100 : Unit 16: Inventions. T:…………………… Lesson 3: Listen . I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to know the process of making paper : Paper making , vat, fibers, rollers.......... -To drill Ss listening skill. II.Teaching aids Textbook + pictures , tape, cassette, III. Teaching procedure. 1.Class oganization: Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………........................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(220)</span> Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do the exercise 2 in the work book. 3.New lesson: A. Warm up: -Ask ss name the inventions by doing the net work.. -Play the tape twice and then complete the sentences in the text book. -Work in pairs to share the answers to the partners. -Read the answers aloud. a) Paper making is a simple process. e) The procedure is almost the same as it was two hundred years ago. f) The pulp vat is on the left of the machine. g) The papermaking X- ray machine has alot of rollers. -Check the answers . -Read again the sentences. fascimile * Post- listening. -Ask Ss to liten to the tape again and then work in pairs to arrange the Inventions. sentences into correct order. -Share the answers to their partners. -Write the answers on the BB. f) paper pulp was placed in the vat. B. Preparation: g) Paper pulp was mixed with water. * Pre-listening. b) The water was drained. -Ask ss to listen to the introduction h) The pulp fibers were poured out. about the lesson and then ask them g) The pulp was conveyed under the to work in pairs to discuss which rollers. materials we use to make paper. f) The fibers were smoothed and  What can we use to make pressed dry. paper? b) The paper was put on a roll.  How is paper made ? -Read the answers aloud - Ask Ss to write the new words and -Check if necessary. their meaning. 4.Consolidation Pulp vat: chum bét giÊy. - Ask ss to retell again the Roll: trôc l¨n, con l¨n processing of making paper. Papermaking machine: 5. Home work m¸y lµm giÊy -Ask Ss to do the exercise in the -Ask Ss to read the new words and work book. write the meaning of new words. -Ask Ss to listen to the tape to do the -----------------------exercise 1 ( p150). ***-------------------------* While - listening..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(221)</span> P:.................... Period 101 : Unit 16: Inventions. T:……………… Lesson 4: Read. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to learn about house hold inventions: Microwave, toaster, vacuum, hair dryer, dishwasher....................... -To drill Ss reading skill. II.Teaching aids Textbook + pictures , work sheets. III. Teaching procedure. 1.Class oganization : Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………....................... Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do the exercise in the work book. 3.New lesson : A. Warm up: -T introduce the lesson and then ask Ss to name the house hold inventions they know in English. - Work in pairs to list the name of inventions. -Write the words on the BB. Microwave. Toaster. Vacuum Hair dryer. Dishwasher................... B. Presentation: * Pre -reading. -Ask ss to listen to the introduction and then write the meaning of new words. Microwave: lß vi sãng. Toaster: m¸y níng b¸nh. Disher: m¸y röa b¸t Vacuum: m¸y hót bôi Hairdryer: m¸y sÊy tãc Air conditioner: m¸y ®iÒu hoµ nhiệt độ. -Read the new words aloud after teacher. * While- reading. -Ask Ss to read the reading in silence to get the meaning of the reading. -Ask ss to read the rading to do the exercise 1 in the text book. + Match the heading to the verses. -Work in pairs to share the anwers to the partners. -Write the answers on the BB. Verse 1: b) Appliances that cook food. Verse2: c) Appliances that clean or dry things. Verse 3 : a) Instruments invented by Alexander Graham Bell. -Check the answers if necessary. -Call Ss to read the reading again to do the exercise 2 in the text book. -Work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the sentences with one invention in the poem. a) " Joan, Where 's the vacuum? I want to clean the floor. " b) Last night I was reading in the bedroom when the telephone rang. It was Ann, an old friend I didn't see for more than 12 years. c) A dishwasher is a kitchen appliance that automatically washes, rinses, and dries dishes. d) " Jane, Why don't you put the meal in the microwave to defrost? e) Can I borrow your hairdryer?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(222)</span> f. We now toast the bread with a toaster on the table -Give the correct answers. -Ask ss to read the reading inturn aloud before the class. * Post-reading. -Ask ss to practice asking ans answering the “ yes- no “ questions about the inventions. 4. Consolidation: - Ask ss to retell the usues of the household inventions. 5. Home work: -Ask ss to do the exercise in the work book. -----------------------***-------------------------P:...................... Period 102 : Unit 16: Inventions. T:……………… Lesson 5: Write. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to learn about how to write the process of making paper and chocolate. -To drill Ss writing skill. II.Teaching aids Textbook + pictures , work sheets. III. Teaching procedure. 1.Class oganization: Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………....................... Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do the exercise in the work book. 3.New lesson :. A. Warm up. -Ask ss to list the house hold inventions that they know in english. -Write them on the BB. -Read them aloud Microwave. Toaster. Vacuum Hair dryer. Dishwasher................... B. Presentation: * Pre -writing. -Ask ss to read the reading and then use the words given to fill in the blank. -Work in pairs to complete. -Write the answers on the clear paper. -Read the answers aloud. 1) First. 2) Then. 3) Next. 4) After this. 5) Then. 6) Finally. -Ask ss to read the reading aloud. * While - reading. -Ask ss to read the order of the lesson and then work in pairs to rearrange the pictures in the correct order. -Share the answer to the partners. Ask Ss to give the correct answers. 3-1-4-5-6 -Ask ss to use the pictures to rewrite the sentences using the sequence makers. -Rearrange the sentences. - Ss work in pairs to write the sentences. d. First, the fruit harvest is fermented for three to nine days to kill the beans and turn them brown. a. Then the beans are dried in the sun. a. Next , The bean are cleared in special machines..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(223)</span> c. Then the beans are roasted to bring out the chocolate flavor. b. After this, They are shelled and groud to produce chocolate liquor. b. The liquor is made into chocolate candy or cocoa powder. * Post - writing. -Ask ss to read again the reading and use the sentences to speak about the way to produce the chocolate. 4. Consolidation: - Ask ss to retell the main content of the lesson. 5. Home work : -Ask ss to rewrite the writing at home and prepare for the language focus -----------------------***-------------------------P:................... Period 103 : Unit 16: Inventions. T:……………. Lesson 6: Language focus. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammar that they are in unit 16. -To drill Ss reading and writing skill. II.Teaching aids Textbook + pictures , work sheets. III. Teaching procedure. 1.Class oganization : Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………....................... Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2.Oral test :. Ask Ss to do the exercise in the work book. 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. -Ask ss to retell the passive voice by giving the form and make examples with the passive form. -Write the form on the BB. -Make examples and write on the BB. + The form: * The present tense: S + be + PP + by O. Ex: The letter is written by him. * The past tense. S + be + PP + by O. Ex: The letter was written by him. * The present perfect tense: S + has / have + been + PP + by O. Ex: The letter has been written by him. B. Presentation. -Ask ss to look at the exercises in the text book and then give the form that are used in the exercise. - Passive voice: - Sequence markers. -Ask Ss to retell the form and list the sequence markers. First, then , after that. Next, finally. C. Practice. -Ask ss to do the exercises in the text book. -Work in pairs to discus and then write on the BB. -Share the answers to the partners. -Ask Ss to write on the BB..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(224)</span> + Change the sentences into passive voice. Ex1: a) The document was typed by Mrs Quen. b) The computer was repaired by Mr Nhan. c) The picture was drawn by Ba. d) The lights was turned off. + Active or passive: -Ask ss work in pairs and do the exercise. Ex2. a)Passive: was awarded. b)Active: won. c)Active: ran. d)Passive: was run / was sold. e)Passive: was closed. + Make questions: -Work in pairs to write the questions and write them on the BB. Ex3: a) What was invented by WL.Judson in 1893? b) What was brought into Vietnam by Phung Khac Khoan ? and When ? c) Who invented the fountain pen? d) Where was the ballpoint pen invented ? + Write the sentences by using the sequence markers . -Write them on the BB after discussing in pairworks. Ex4: a) First, the rice crop was harvested. b) Then the rice plants was thrested. c)Next , the rice grains was husked by the mill to produce brown rice. d) Finally , the brain was removed by the mortar and it was winnowed to make white rice. D. Production. -Ask ss to retell the way to make the white rice in traditional way. -Ask Ss to work in pairs to retell the passive form. 4. Consolidation : -Ask ss to retell the main form of the passive voice. 5. Home work: - Ask Ss to review the grammar structures from unit 9 to 16. - Prepare for the revision lesson. -----------------------***-------------------------P:…………............ Period 104 : ¤n tËp vµ kiÓm tra HK II T:…………………. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to review the grammar that they learnt from unit 9 to unit 16. -To drill Ss reading and writing skill. II.Teaching aids Textbook , work sheets. III. Teaching procedure. 1.Class oganization : Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………....................... Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2.Oral test: Ask Ss to do the exercise in the work book. 3.New lesson: A. Warm up:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(225)</span> -Ask Ss to review the main grammar that they learnt from unit 9 to unit 16. -The passive voice. -The direct speech. -Would you mind + Ving ? -Would you mind + if .....? B. Presentaion -Ask ss to listen to the form of exeercises that they are going to do. + Choose the best anwser. +Rewrite the sentences. + Choose the correct verb. + Read and answer the questions. C. Practice. -Ask ss to work in pairs to do these exercise below, Ex1: Choose the best answer: 20. Do you know how .............computers ? a. use b. using c. to use. 21.Life in the city is different ..................life in the country. a. with b. of c. from. 22.My mother showed me how .......clothes. a. to make b. making c. make. 23.My computer hasn’t........since last week. a. work b. worked c. working.. 24. This dish looks.................. a. deliciously delicious. b. c. badly.. 25.This is the boy ...................Tim. a. calling. b. calls. c. called. 26.Are you...............in detective films? a. interested b. interesting c. interest. 27.They had a ...................time in Hanoi. a. wonderful b. wonder c.wonderfully -Work in pairs to give the answers -Ask ss to work in pairs to write the sentences on the BB. 1.My mother often gives me present on my birthday. ( Change into passive ) ->I am............................................... 2. “ Is the weather warm and nice ?“Thu asked Hoa 1. They built this house two years ago.  This house was........................ 4. Could you bring these flowers home? Would you mind ..............................? -Ask ss work in pairs to do the exercises. -Write the answers on the BB. Ex3: Choose the correct form of the verb: 1.These essays ( were written / is written ) by Daisy.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(226)</span> 2. Would you mind if I ( closed / closing ) the window ? 3. I ( met / was meeting ) a friend when I ( am doing /was doing ) the shopping. 4.This time last Monday we ( are taking / were taking ) the final test. 5. Could you tell me how ( to go / going ) from Vinh to Phong Nha Cave ? 6.Linh asked me ( if / has ) I lived in Quang Nam province. 7.She said that she ( like / liked) swimming in the sea in Autumn. - Read and complete the sentences with yet or already; 1) I’ve started learning computer but I ‘ve not learnt very much.......... 2) I’m still trying to finished my home work. I’ve.................been at it for hours. 3) The children are still watching TV. They haven’t been to bed............. 4) We offer to help Tim with the bike but he has..................mended it. 5) Ba has’t gone to school.............He is still having breakfast. 6) We have...........seen Titanic and we don’t want to see it again. -Read the sentences aloud. D. Production. -Ask Ss to review the grammar structures that are mentioned in the lesson. 4. Consolidation : -Ask ss to review the exercise and the grammar they ‘ve learnt. 5. Home work: - Prepare for the final test -----------------------***--------------------------. P:……............. Period 104 : ¤n tËp vµ kiÓm tra HK II T:…………….. Time allowance: 45 minutes. I. Objectives. - To check Ss ‘ knowledge. After learning the lessons of the second semester.. To test the passive voice, the indirect speech , present and past participle. - To drill Ss reading and writing skills. II. Preparation: - Questions and key III. Testing procedures. 1. Class organization: Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………....................... Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2. Usual checking: - Check the preparation of Ss. 3Testing time:. Give out the questions:. I. Choose the best answer. (4p).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(227)</span> 1.The woman ....................the red shirt is my Math teacher. a. wearing b. wear c. worn 2.Two team members have to make a fire in............................... a. a making fire contest b. a firemaking contest c. a contest for making fire. 3. Thu is very keen .........................sports. a. on b. at c. in. 4. Have you ever been to Phong Nha...................... in Vietnam. a. Reef b. Cave c. Bay 5.The USA is famous for its........................... a. Statue of Liberty. b. Eiffel Tower c. Big Ben Clock 6.Lan .................... her rain coat home. a. always forget b. is always forgetting c. always forgot. 7. ......................I was having dinner, my sister was listening to music. a. How b. While. c. as 8. Do you know how .....................computers ? a. use b. using c. to use. II. Rewrite the sentences without changing their meaning. ( 2p). 1.My mother often gives me present on my birthday. ( Change into passive ). ->I am ..................................................... ...................................................... 2.“ Is the weather warm and nice?“Thu asked Hoa.(Change into indirect speech). ->Thu asked Hoa if ........................................................ ................................. 3. They built this house two years ago. ( Change into passive ).  This house was..................................................... ............................................... 4.Could you bring these flowers home ? ( Would you mind + Ving ....? )  Would you mind .................................................. ..........................................? III.Underline the correct form of the verbs to complete the following sentences.( 2p). 1.This problem ( is dicussed / was discussed ) at the last meeting. 2.We (were watching / are watching) a football game on TV when our friends came. 3.Thu ( is talking / was talking ) to her friend on the phone at 8 o’clock lastnight. 4.Liz said that she ( will send / would send ) me some information about her school. IV.Read the passage and decide which sentence true ( T ) or false ( F).2p Halong- Bay is popular with both Vietnamese and international tourists. One of the attractions of Halong is the Bay’s calm water with limestone mountains. The Bay’s water is clear during the spring and early summer. Upon arriving in Halong City, visitors can go along Chay Beach. From the beach, they can hire aboat and go out to the Bay. It is here that the visitors can find some of Southeast Asia’s most beautiful sites. Dau Go Cave is one of the most beautiful caves at.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(228)</span> Halong. It was the cave in which General Tran Hung Dao hid wooden stakes to beat the Mongols on Bach Dang River in 1288. ................ 1. Halong Bay is popular with only international tourists. ................. 2. The Bay‘s water is calm and clear. ................ 3.When visitors arrive in Ha long, They can walk along Chay Beach. .................4. Dau Go Cave was a place in which General Tran Hung Dao hid wooden stakes. 4. Consolidation: - Collect all testing papers. - Give some remarks on Ss' work. 5. Homework: - Review all key points. -----------------------***-------------------------P:9/3/2008 Period 76: Unit 12: A vacation abroad T:14/3/2008 Lesson 13: Listen I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able tobe provided the structure the words used in the weather forecast and the adjective ( dry, cold.......), degree , minus degree, zero degree............. -To drill Ss listening skills. II.Teaching aids Tape + cassette +Textbook + pictures of famous places . III. Teaching procedure. 1.Class oganization :. Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………....................... Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2.Oral test : - Ask Ss to do the exercise given by teacher last period: write the itinerary of the journey from Ha hoa to Ha noi. 3.New lesson : B. Warm up : Name the famous World heritages of some country in the world. -Write on the BB , and read the words aloud.  The great wall.  The leaning tower.  Ha long Bay.  The Big Ben.  The great pyramids.  The Eiffel tower.  The statue of the liberty.  The sydney Opera House. .......................................... .. -Others Ss give the remark. C. Pre- listening. - Introduce the lesson and ask Ss the question about the weather.  What is the weather like today ?  What is the weather like in Spring / Summer, /Fall/ and winter in Vietnam ?  Which season do you like best ? Why ? C. While –listening. -Ask Ss to listen to the tape to complete the table with the weather information about the big cities in the world..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(229)</span> - The information includes weather characteristics and the details of temperature in the cities. -Play the tape three times and ask Ss to work in pairs to discuss and compare the answer to their friends. -Write the answer on the BB. -Read the answer aloud. -Check if necessary. Provide the new words: Minus degree: độ âmZero degree: không độ Degree centigrate: độ C D. Post- listening. -Ask Ss to write the weather forcast about the big cities. -Compare to friends. -read the weather forcast aloud. -Check if neccessary. + Read the weather forcast aloud. + Hanoi today will be dry and windy , with a low of fifteen and a high of twenty two. + Ho Chi Minh will be a dry day today, and warm. For the temperature, the low will be twenty, and the high will be twenty six degree. 4.Consolidation. - Retell the main content of the lesson 5 Homework. -Do exercise 2+3 in the work book.. P: 6/4/2008 Period 87– Unit 14: Wonders of the World. T: 9/4/2008 Lesson 3 : Listen. I. Objectives : -After the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the world. heritage: Great Barrier Reef, and know how to use the words in advertisements. -To drill Ss listening skills. II.Teaching aids Tape + casstte ,textbook + pictures, III. Teaching procedure. 1.Class oganization : Class 8A1:..................... Absent:............... ………………....................... Class 8A2:..................... Absent:.............. ………………........................ 2.Oral test : Ask Ss to do exercise 3 in the work book ( Page 85)? 3.New lesson : A. Warm up. -Ask ss to play the Noughts and Crosses about the famous places. Great wall Ha long Bay Big Ben Emprire State. Eiffel. Phong Nha Cave. Everest.. Hue Citadel Twin Tower. Tower.. B-Pre- listening. - Ask Ss to look at the lesson and write down the new words in the note book. Jungle: rõng. Crystal- clear water:Níc trong nh pha lª. Coral Sea: biÓn san h«. Snorkel: b¬i lÆn cã sö dông èng thë -Ask Ss to listen the tape and then correct the mistake of the listening. C. While- listening. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and then correct the mistakes..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(230)</span> - Write the anwsers and then share the answers to their friends. -Read the answers aloud. -T correct if necessary. - Ask Ss to read the advertisement. Do you want a quiet , relaxing vacation? - Look no further than beautiful far north Queensland. Stay right on the beach at the coconut Palm Hotel. Take guided tours through the rainforest, swim in the crystal clear water of the coral Sea amd Snorkel amongst the Coral of the great barrier Reef Marine Park- A World heritage site. -Call ( 077 ) 692439027 for more information. D. Post -listening. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and read aloud the listening. - Ask Ss to use the words to make the similar adertisement about the Hung King Temple. E. Practice. Change these sentences into indirect speech.. 5) "My sister likes cooking,"said Nam. 6) “ We are learning how to make cakes,” Said the schoolgirls. 7) “ I can repair the bike myself”, my friend told me. 8) “ We are going to have an English- speaking club “, said Mai. 5) ”Do you want to visit dien Bien Phu, Lan ?”. I said. 6) “Does your brother study at a university, Nam?” Quang asked me. 7) “Is Halong Bay in Northern Vietnam, Phuong?” Mary asked Phuong. 4. Consolidation: Retell the main content of the lesson. - 5. Home work : - Ask Ss to do the exercise 4 in the work book ( p85) ------------------------***-------------------------.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(231)</span>

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×